JP2022132650A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having an excellent operational feeling.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes a posture correcting device 13312, which applies a load for changing posture of a swing operation member 13310 in a direction for reducing the amount of change of the posture when posture of the swing operation member 13310, which is viewed from a player operating the swing operation member 13310, is changed by movement of a lever member 13340, thus maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to be posture in that a player can easily operate.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine including an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by being manually operated by a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating members.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine with good operability of operating members.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises an operation member having an operation portion operated by a player and configured to be movable, and a movable operating member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is movable. movement of the connecting member, the posture of the operating member viewed from the player who operates the operating section is changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state. Correction means is provided for changing the attitude of the operating member in a direction that reduces the amount of change in the attitude when it can be formed.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a driving device for driving the connection member, and in a moving range of the connection member, a change state in which the posture of the operation member changes, and the operation A maintenance state is formed in which the members are not changed in posture and the postures of the operating member and the connecting member are maintained, and the load generated on the operating member from the correcting means during the changed state brakes the connecting member. face the direction to let

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a member to be contacted that is brought into contact with the correcting means, and the correcting means contacts the member to be contacted when the operation member is moved. The posture of the operation member changes by contact.

According to the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation member.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the operability during the drive operation.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the weight of the operation member can be reduced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member; Fig. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a main body member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member and a swing member of the lever member; It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member taken along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). is. (a) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member taken along line XVc-XVc of FIG. 15(a). is. (a) is a front view of a lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb in FIG. It is a top view of a lever member in direction view. (a) is a front view of the operation device, and (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17(a); c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a); Fig. 18(b) is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of Fig. 18(a); 17B is a cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member taken along line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. FIG. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). (a) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of a main body member, (d) is a side view of a main body member in the arrow XXXd direction view of FIG.30(c). (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in direction XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in direction XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a), and (c) is FIG. 32(a). 10 is a side view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in direction XXXIIc of FIG. (a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). (a) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a locking member, and an unlocking cam member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a locking member, and an unlocking cam member. 4(a) to 4(c) are front views of the body member of the oscillating member illustrated as viewed in the axial direction of the pivot rod. FIG. (a) is a top view of a motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate as viewed in the direction of XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37(b). FIG. 10 is a side view of the motor fixing plate showing a state in which the U-shaped member has been slid from the state; 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the third embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device in a 4th embodiment. 44(a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as seen in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are side views of a locking member. Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member; 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); (a) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side views of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member as viewed in the direction of LIIIb in FIG. 53(a). It is a diagram. 7(a) and 7(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operation device taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a fifth embodiment; (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56(a), and (c) is a LVIc of FIG. It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in direction view. 57(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIb in FIG. 57(a), and (c) is FIG. 57(a). is a side view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIc. (a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of LVIII in FIG. 58(a). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lock member; (a) and (b) show the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the seventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the eighth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the tenth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member; Fig. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a main body member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member and a swing member of the lever member; It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (a) is a bottom view of the front cover and rear cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, rear cover and separation prevention cover, and (c) is line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83(b). 2 is a cross-sectional view of the front cover, the rear cover, the separation prevention cover, and the protection cover in FIG. (a) is a perspective view of a back side frame member, and (b) is a back side frame member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc of FIG. 84(b). (a) is a front perspective view of a hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 85(d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd of FIG. 85(b). FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the supporting member, (b) is a top view of the supporting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a), and (c) is LXXXVIc in FIG. 86(b). -LXXXVIc is a cross-sectional view of the support member. (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a), and (c) is a back side FIG. 87D is a partial top view of the frame member and the posture correction device, FIG. 87D is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87(d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of 87(d). (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 88(c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId in FIG. 88(c). (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88(e). is. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 91(a) is a front view of a lock member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91(a). FIG. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); (a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); (a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. (a) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross section of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 98(d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along the line LXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98(c). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 99(a). It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction apparatus. (a) to (d) are side views of the operation device according to the sixteenth embodiment. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the seventeenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the eighteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); FIG. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the nineteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twentieth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 104(a) is a rear view of the swing operation member as viewed in the direction of arrow CV in Fig. 104(a); 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twenty-first embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 are arranged to be operated by the player to hit the ball to the front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole. A pair of out ports are provided on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335 a and 337 a and vibration device 366 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped by the player. The unit 15 can be moved in a region defined by a housing recess 15a vertically recessed in the center of the unit 15 in the left-right direction.

Between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a, there is a gap large enough for at least a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grasp the swing operation member 310 from above. When the swing operation member 310 is grasped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swing operation member 310. The hand is prevented from slipping down from the swing operation member 310 even if the force is relaxed and gravity is used. Therefore, the burden of keeping the player's hand on the swing operation device 310 can be reduced.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a). 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. ), and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown in phantom lines.

The housing recess 15 a of the lower tray unit 15 and the housing recess 17 a of the upper tray 17 are sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, when the player holds the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent fingers from being caught between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310 . In this state, the lens member 317, which also serves as a push button portion, is arranged to face the palm, so that the player can push the vibration member 310 by gripping the swing operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to press the lens member 317 while holding the swinging operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger while holding the swinging operation member 310 or changing the grip of the swinging operation member 310 . can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

A lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player holds the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, by vibrating the lens member 317 after detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.). It is possible to prevent situations in which people do not notice. Therefore, the presentation effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pressing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and it is possible to concentrate too much on the timing of the input operation and not play the game. You can solve the problem of not being able to concentrate.

When the player holds the swing operation member 310, the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand. It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to grasp whether the swing operation member 310 is moving or not. Therefore, only the player holding the swing operation member 310 can be notified of the big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 differ between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when the player operates the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction or in the front-rear direction, so that the player can feel the actual operation.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310 , the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312 and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311 . Since the back side frame member 311 is bent back in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of curvature radius on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. 7(b). It is possible to prevent the fingertips from coming off the back side frame member 311 even in a posture where the wrist is stiff, such as when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In addition, since the fingertips are caught on the rear-side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and a large amount of vibration felt by the player can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swinging operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, thereby naturally turning the wrist. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swinging operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22(b)) can be performed by extending the wrist in a state in which the wrist is released from the turning. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the pivotal support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, the length from the upper end of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the pivot rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. As a result, when the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated about the shaft support rod 363, the swing operation member 310 can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, a large force may be required to rotate the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363 by placing a hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 (misoperation). Therefore, the burden on the player when holding the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can put his/her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310, thereby An erroneous operation to rotate the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is arranged such that the swing operation member 310 protrudes from the rectangular outer case member 320 toward the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 arranged inside the outer case member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 has a rear side formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11). A front cover 321 attached in such a manner as to hide an edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a projecting portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, the front cover 321 and the upper cover. A left cover member 323 and a right cover member 324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in such a manner that the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right direction of the inner case member 322 are fitted into the inner case member 330. and a sensor board 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a arranged to protrude inside.

By fastening and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 while fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from being visible in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent tampering by disassembling the operation device 300 .

The sensor member 325a includes a first photocoupler type sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a second photocoupler type sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and the second sensor member 325a2. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors for detecting the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor for detecting the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor includes a light-projecting part that projects light and a light-receiving part that receives the light from the light-projecting part, and has a gap (slit) into which a part to be detected can be inserted. It means sensors arranged in a substantially U-shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 10, illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 which are assembled into a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 331. an eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by a shaft 331d2, a phase detecting member 334 whose relative phase with the eccentric cam member 333 remains unchanged and which is pivotally supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333; A first driving device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside and generates driving force for rotating the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. , a second driving device 337 which is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside and generates driving force for rotating the lock member 336; , is mainly provided.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member with an opening formed on the right side. A rectangular plate-like upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side in front view (rear side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and an upper side wall portion 331b extending rightward from the edge of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-like connection side wall portion 331c that abuts the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of cylindrical rod-like members projecting rightward from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e drilled in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-like member 331d projecting leftward from the upper side wall portion 331b. and a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member with an opening formed on the left side, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the right side portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side wall portion 332a. A plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right in front view (the front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that extends leftward from the edge of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b is the front side. A plate-like connection side wall portion 332c that abuts against the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion, and a pair of circular shapes are perforated in the lower side wall portion 332a so as to form a gear portion of the second driving device 337. A drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted through, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a rightward extension of the upper side wall portion 332b. A cylindrical shaft support portion 332g with a bottom that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the protruding rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular projection projecting annularly on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. 332i and .

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed such that the front upper portion thereof has a 1/4 circular shape centered on the pivot portions 331g and 332g when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17(b)), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c Notches 331c1 and 332c1 cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper front side.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (displacement in the extending direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by using the quarter circle shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed from four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-like member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from the bottom and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is rotatably supported, and both ends of the lever support shaft 331d1 are supported by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are aligned in phase.

Both the lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member supported by the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336 c of the member 336 .

The insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes in this embodiment. That is, an elongated guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, and a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2 which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a driving member insertion hole 331e3 which is arranged below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is drilled in a manner in which a pair of circular shapes are combined. Prepare the Lord.

The guide support hole 331e1 is inserted with the angle regulating rod member 346, guides the swinging motion of the lever member 340, and defines the terminal end of the swinging motion of the lever member 340 at its end.

The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. , and in this state, the pedestal portion of the portion that supports the driving gear 337b can be fitted into the small circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b can be inserted through the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported in the second drive device 337 (requires a hole with a diameter equal to or greater than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b), and the inserted second drive device 337 can be It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having a diameter similar to that of the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

The insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes in this embodiment. That is, a guide support hole 332e1 formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and through which the angle regulating rod member 346 of the lever member 340 is guided, and a rectangular shape disposed on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole arranged at a position where the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is rotated about the shaft support 332g. and a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 that detect the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft supports 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring engaging portions 331h and 332h are arranged in front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend laterally outward of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332, respectively.

In this embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 abuts the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end abuts the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 onto the annular protrusion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 335a and driven to rotate. The driving gear 335b is meshed with the body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333 to transmit the driving force.

The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and includes a main body portion 336a having a substantially L-shaped hook shape on the distal end side, and a shaft that is bored through the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped protrusion extending from the base end side of the body portion 336a outward in the axial radial direction of the shaft support hole 336b. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided, and a plate-like detection piece 336e extending radially outwardly of the shaft support hole 336b and capable of passing through the gap between the sensor members 331f.

The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted.

The second driving device 337 mainly includes a driving motor 337a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 337a and driven to rotate. The drive gear 337b meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336 to transmit the driving force.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that engages and rotates. The member is meshed with gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and gear damper receiving members 342 and posture detection members 343, which are fastened and fixed to the left and right sides of the lever member 340, and an anti-breakage mechanism. A disassembled state of the peeling member 350 arranged as .

The rear-side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes toward the rear side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) toward the front side from the protruding tip, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (see FIG. 17(b). )reference). An insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening, is provided in the recessed portion. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 includes a main body member 341 made of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section. A gear damper receiving member 342 having a substantially circular outer shape when viewed, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342 and which has a substantially circular outer shape when viewed in the axial direction and is fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. A posture detection member 343 that is fixed, an upper cover member 344 that is formed in a shape that fits over the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and a main body member 341 that sandwiches the upper cover member 344. A lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, an angle regulating rod member 346 inserted through the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the posture detecting member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 are coaxial with each other. It mainly includes a pivotally supported peeling member 350 and an oscillating member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 .

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular portion 342a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. The posture detecting member 343 has a tubular portion 343a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a position farthest from the tubular portion 343a (back side in FIG. 11). and a plate-like sensor detection piece 343b extending along.

Cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions that are inserted through shaft holes 341b of main body member 341, and lever support shafts 331d1 (see FIG. 10) are inserted through the inner peripheral sides thereof. This allows the lever member 340 to swing about the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342 b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10 ), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340 .

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that can detect the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18(c)).

The peeling member 350 includes a plate-like body member 351 provided with an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and through which the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted; It mainly includes a fixed rectangular raising member 353 and a magnet member 354 arranged on the upper side of the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and made of a magnetic material.

The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 , so that the main body member 341 and the main body member 351 are united or separated.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340. FIG.

A body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a body portion 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the body portion 341a, and a pair of shaft holes 341b. A regulation hole 341c is drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and a regulating hole 341c extends downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a at the front side end of the main body 341a. a pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left and right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left and right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. and a regulating hole 341f.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation bar member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which a support rod 363 that supports the swinging member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which a regulation rod 365 that regulates the swinging angle of the swinging member 360 is inserted. is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the buffer member 364 is provided around the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG.

The upper cover member 344 is made of a resin material and fastened to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has a curved surface on the back side along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. a guide portion 344a, an outer fitting portion 344b formed continuously with the guide portion 344a and having a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, the guide portion 344a and the outer fitting portion 344b. and a connecting portion 344c that connects the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is thinned (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is made of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below. an outer fitting portion 345b having a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below; It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c that is disposed on the side and is curved toward the front side, and a front guide portion 345d that extends from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The rear guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. As shown in FIG. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the rear guide portion 345 a and the guide portion 344 a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330 .

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swinging of the body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the oscillating member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in. The front guide portion 345d allows the oscillating member 360 to move in the axial direction. positional deviation is suppressed.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the body member 341 (made of metal material) of the lever member 340 from coming into direct contact with the body member 341 . That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 made of a resin material between them, it is possible to mitigate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The oscillating member 360 is arranged at the front end of the body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is capable of swinging around the shaft hole 341e. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a disposed thereon and having a U-shaped cross section is engaged with the wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and is coaxially supported with the main body member 361. a plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted through the shaft holes 361c and 341e of the body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 is fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. A cushioning member 364 to be fitted, a torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the cushioning member 364, a cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and a motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. and a vibrating device 366 mainly composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibrations in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the body.

The main body member 361 includes a pair of plate-shaped side walls 361a that are arranged to face each other, a front wall 361b that connects the side walls 361a at the ends on the front side, and a pair of side walls 361a that are coaxially and circularly perforated. A shaft hole 361c into which a buffer member 364 is fitted, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which a regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a and a It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e that is bent in directions away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle around the shaft hole 361c, the body member 361 can be moved while the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c. can be oscillated.

The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the cushioning member 364 similarly to the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress transmission of vibration generated on the swing member 360 side to the body member 341 side of the lever member 340 .

The angle regulation hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 made of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulation hole 361d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically engaged with the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , is mainly provided.

The body portion 362a has a protrusion 362a1 protruding from the front side, and is locked by inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole drilled in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is provided with a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e, and is a portion that is externally supported by the cushioning member 364. The side wall portion 362b is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swinging member supporting portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the main body member 341 from the outside. is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Among those externally supported by the cushioning member 364, the body member 361 is fitted onto the base portion 364b, and the body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are fitted onto the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of an electromagnetic force. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged to form a disk shape. and a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

The torsion spring SP2 has one end locked to the body member 341 and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362 . In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swinging member 360 in a direction in which it falls with respect to the main body member 341 .

13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to a back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11), and the back side frame member 311 is fastened and fixed to a fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. and a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 of the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disc shape without a hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the center of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched between the vibrating member 314 through which the light guide member 313a projecting from the center is inserted. A switch member 315 arranged to face the vibrating member 314, an intermediate member 316 externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 accommodated on the back side and externally supported by the vibrating member 314. and a lens member 317 .

With the configuration described above, the swing operation member 310 has the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 fixed to each other. .

The intermediate frame member 312 includes an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to a plane formed by the bottom portion 312a. A plurality of columnar switch support rods 312c erected from the bottom 312a, and a back button member 312d movably arranged in the front-rear direction on the upper back side of the bottom 312a.

The bottom portion 312a includes rectangular recessed portions 312a1 recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted. , the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312 .

The switch support rod 312 c is a member that is commonly inserted through the vibration guide member 313 , the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 . This can prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 operate in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the oblique direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance to the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. . In addition, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, or a reciprocating motion in which the member moves in a straight line, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and then returns.

The back button member 312d is normally arranged in a position protruding toward the back side by a coil spring interposed between it and the bottom portion 312a, and has a plate-like detection piece 312d1 in the central portion on the front side.

The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 313a erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end arranged on the front side. It mainly includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c provided and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member having a light emitting member such as an LED arranged on the back side thereof. The light guide member 313 a is inserted through the vibrating member 314 , the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 , so that the distal end portion of the light guide member 313 a is arranged opposite (arranged close to) the lens member 317 . Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 operate in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from tilting in the operating direction. In addition, the switch member 315 can be prevented from contacting the light guide member 313a by tilting and damaging the light guide member 313a.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that a detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21(a)) provided on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap, thereby detecting the arrangement of the switch member 315. As shown in FIG.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swing posture of the swing operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 includes a main body portion 314a having a substantially disk-like cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole in the center, and a plurality of switch support rods 312c ( switch support holes 314b (four places in this embodiment), a central cylindrical portion 314c projecting from the central portion of the body portion 314a toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and around which the oscillating coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. a switch receiving member 314d that is inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the body portion 314a; and a light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The compression coil spring CS2 has a smaller elastic modulus than the oscillating coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portions 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the four concave portions formed on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a larger diameter than the switch support hole 314b on the front side. The portion 314d1 is engaged with the switch support hole 314b. The pressing coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a disk-shaped body portion 315a, a spring receiving portion 315b projecting from the center of the body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13) on a cup, and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged in the vertical center (vertical center in FIG. 13). Guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, arm 315f inserted and locked in concave portion 312a1, and first sensor member 313c. ), a plate-like detection piece 315g protruding on the back side.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c and smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Thereby, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction approaching the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315 e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314 d , it is possible to suppress the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 .

The intermediate member 316 has a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14(b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14(c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). 4 is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member 333 taken on line. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a body portion 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical portion 333b arranged coaxially with the rotation axis of the body portion 333a, and a cylindrical portion 333b. A cam portion 333c, which extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b and has a hollow interior, and a cam portion 333c extending axially along the tip of the cylindrical portion 333b. A pair of cutouts 333d, a plate-like rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in a direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped canopy that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. A part 333f is mainly provided.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged with a shift in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends (elastically deforms) inward, thereby absorbing the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape and is eccentrically fixed to the body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for keeping the relative phase with the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) unchanged, and a pair of notches arranged oppositely are formed with different lengths in the circumferential direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by being reversed by 180 degrees.

By arranging the rib portion 333e in such a manner as to connect the cam portion 333c at a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b and the cylindrical portion 333b, the hollow cam portion 333c has the highest strength. It can improve the strength of weakened parts. As a result, damage to the cam portion 333c can be suppressed.

In addition, the rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Accordingly, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. parts can abut each other. As a result, the fatigue of the rib portion 333e can be suppressed while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of deflection (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), thereby improving the durability of the rib portion 333e. can be made

15(a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15(b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15(c) is a line XVc-XVc of FIG. 15(a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member 334 at line; In addition, in FIG. 15(c), the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17(a)) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and includes a shaft support portion 334a that is externally fitted and supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and its shaft support portion. An enlarged diameter portion 334b connected to 334a and enlarged in diameter (diameter enlarged in two steps) toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15(c)), and an axial direction from the front end of the enlarged diameter portion 334b. It mainly includes a plate-like detection piece 334c extending from the bottom and a detent projection 334d having a shape that matches the notch 333d.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is fitted onto an annular projection 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. As shown in FIG. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner side surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 on the outer side surface of the annular convex portion 332i from the inner peripheral side, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be strengthened. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, it is possible to suppress axial displacement when the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 receives a load from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c can pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the engagement of the anti-rotation projection 334d and the notch 333d detects the attitude of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase to the phase detection member 334 remains unchanged. can do.

16(a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16(b) is a side view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16(a), and FIG. FIG. 16B is a top view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, compared to the shaft hole 341b, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the body member 341 and is lower than a straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b (see FIG. 16A). ) below). As a result, the load generated on the swing member 360 side can be suppressed from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 , and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340 .

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the body member 341 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is disposed on the open side of the U-shaped. A slight gap is provided between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 .

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 (lower side in FIG. 16B) with the peeling member 350. can be secured.

In addition, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). Movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. When the member 340 receives an overload and the peeling member 350 is separated from the body member 341, the body member 341 can be prevented from swinging at high speed due to the momentum of the applied load.

17(a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position (a state in which the player presses down).

18(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18(b) is a portion of the operation device 300 along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17(a). 18(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a). 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18(a). 18(b) and 18(c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18( a ), when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 contacts the lower side surface of the peeling member 350 . Since the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions by the lock member 336 coming into contact with the upper side surface, the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is pivoted about the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 from the portion where the lock member 336 blocks the swinging of the peeling member 350. is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state in which the rocking of the peeling member 350 is blocked by the lock member 336 can be adjusted by design.

In this embodiment, when the distance between the rotating shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is the shortest, that is, when the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350, the tubular portion 333b The locking member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is in contact with the peeling member 350 .

In other words, the length of the body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 while the peeling member 350 is in contact with the cylindrical portion 333b. .

Therefore, when the locking member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always positioned on the lower side of the peeling member 350. is abutted on the side of the Therefore, when the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position and an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is overloaded. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being caught, and it is possible to suppress the breakage of the eccentric cam member 333 .

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the rear side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 plays a role of generating viscous resistance to the rocking motion of the lever member 340, and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing backward. have a combination of

By arranging the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is greatly increased. On the other hand, the resistance can be reduced when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

As a result, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only in a state in which the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. By doing so, it becomes possible to bring the locking member 336 into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 .

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 has not swung from the state shown in FIG. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341 .

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along line XX-XX in FIG. 17(b). Note that illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by a coil spring, so that a pressing load (upward in FIG. 20) is applied. In a state in which no additional load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pressing load (upward load in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap between the second sensor members 313d. It is possible to detect that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

21(a) and 21(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 21(a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the state of FIGS. 18(a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, ) and the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state in FIG.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312. The vibrating member 314 is connected to the vibrating coil spring CS1. is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21(a)).

From this state, an electric current is passed through a copper wire (not shown) wound around a bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366. When the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by an electromagnetic force generated, the vibrating member 314 moves toward the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pushed. As a result, the lens member 317 externally fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21(a)). In this state, the stepped portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, making it difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to be pushed).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing of the player's input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314 .

In addition, since the pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and the pushinhibited state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is not affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

For example, when the player intermittently and repeatedly pushes (hit) the lens member 317, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the reaction causes the lever member 340 to move the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18(a)). ))), the swing operation member 310 receives a load. Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in disabled state is established, the swing operation member 310 as a whole is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18(a)). move in the direction Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 from colliding with each other due to the swing operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method for constructing the push-incapable state, there is a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-shaped claw, or a method of moving the lens member 317 to the end position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. A method of overhanging (continuing to apply a load in one direction) and the like are exemplified. According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the end position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, vibrating the lens member 317 by the vibrating device 366 and making the lens member 317 unable to be pushed. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the electromagnetic force, there is a possibility that the moving speed of the vibrating member 314 becomes slow. , and moves downward in FIG. 21(b).

This makes it possible to speed up the vibration of the lens member 317 without fastening the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314 together.

In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the oscillating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317 . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the stepped portion 317a formed on the rear side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, whereby the lens member is pushed. 317 and vibrating member 314 move integrally with switch member 315 . Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the oscillating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the oscillating coil spring CS1 from acting as resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that contacts the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18(a)).

That is, the pressing coil spring CS2 that restores the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 that restores the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

In this embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pressing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the oscillating coil spring CS1, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while securing a high speed for returning the oscillating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the easiness of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22(a) and 22(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 22(a) and 22(b) show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22(a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. FIG. 22(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed to the rear side (right side in FIG. 22(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 22(a).

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) to lift the swing operation member 310 about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(a)) from the state of FIG. 22(a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

Swinging of the lever member 340 due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of locations that are abutted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Each contact point will be described in detail below.

Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted through the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the pivoting of the lever member 340 can be stopped by the angle regulating rod member 346 coming into contact with the ends of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. can be done. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction. tilting in the turning direction can be suppressed.

A connecting portion 344 c of an upper cover member 344 can come into contact with the upper cover 322 . The connecting portion 344c has a step portion 344c1, which is a portion that vertically abuts on the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22(a)). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the stepped portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space. can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of impact to the main body member 341, so that the structure of the main body member 341 can be simplified, and the weight of the entire lever member 340 can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and along with this, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

Further, the upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering inside the inner case member 330 in addition to the role of absorbing the impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23(b)), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always kept closed, so that dust does not enter inside the inner case member 330. and balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can abut against the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the direction of the swing axis (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 22(a)). Thus, the upper cover member 344 can be used to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 . By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 directed toward the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibrating device 366 in the vibrating direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibration device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is provided between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364 . As a result, vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between straight line L1 and straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of lever member 340 is defined as angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. It is possible to suppress the load (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) of the lens member 317 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibration device 366 is arranged on the front side (the left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibration device 366 operates pushes the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 downward. be directed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibrating device 366 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device 366 .

As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load directed toward the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310 .

When the swing operation member 310 is pressed, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component of the vibration of the vibration device 366 along the straight line L2 can be made smaller than in the state of FIG. 22(a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310 .

Also, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. A plurality of types of vibrations, ie, vibrations in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibrations in which the swing operation member 310 rotates about the shaft support rod 363 can be produced.

23(a) is a cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 23(b) is a cross-section of operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a). It is a diagram. 23 shows a state in which the body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 while the rocking of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down. A cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of load (a load greater than the attractive force due to magnetic force) is applied in the direction in which the lens member 317 is pushed in, or a predetermined amount or more of a load is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down (a magnetic force). When a load greater than the attractive force is applied, the body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354, and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the locking member 336 and the peeling member 350, and damage to the locking member 336 and the peeling member 350 can be suppressed.

In addition, the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down. Since no load is transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, the removal of the peeling member 350 from the body member 341 can be detected by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2.

In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. As a result, the lever member 340 swings excessively, which may put a burden on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swinging operation member 310 are arranged facing each other and come into contact with each other. Even if it rotates too much, the load can be relieved by deforming the rear side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

23(a), the body member 341 is swung clockwise in FIG. is again adsorbed to the peeling member 350 . Thereby, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swing shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 causes the main body member 341 to swing. It does not affect the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341 . That is, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off, the moment applied to the main body member 341 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. can be done.

In addition, the body member 341 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 moves in such a manner as to enter from the open side of the U-shaped body member 341 to the closed side of the U-shaped body member 341 . If frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

The biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and is not transmitted to the peeling member 350. Therefore, when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated, the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam is pressed. It is possible to prevent the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated.

23(a), the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336, so that the sensor detecting piece 343b enters the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 again, thereby It is possible to detect that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24(a) and 24(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 24(a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 has been swung from the state shown in FIG. 22(a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24(a)), 24(a), the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated about 180 degrees and the lever member 340 is swung. Also, the external shapes of the lever member 340 and the swinging operation member 310 in a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap between the sensor members 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 has swung toward the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 has rocked to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first driving device 335, and the lever member 340 is rocked. can be made The eccentric cam member 333 may be rotated continuously in one direction, or the direction of rotation may be switched midway.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 (clockwise direction in FIG. 24(a)). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 . As a result, the player's attention can be easily focused on the swing operation member 310 .

When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24(a) or FIG. 24(b), the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366 can be suppressed.

Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward (see FIG. 24 ( a) There is a possibility that the swinging operation member 310 will be pushed (clockwise in FIG. 24(a)).

In this embodiment, in any case, a load acts to swing the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333, so that the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. can be suppressed. Thereby, durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 25(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 24(b), and FIG. 2, the state in which the eccentric cam member 333 has been rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of 1 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. 25(a) and 25(b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swinging operation member 310 in a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, the swinging member 360 is urged forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25), so that the player can easily hold and push down the swinging operation member 310 . That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25(a)) from the state of FIG. The swinging operation member 310 can be pushed down immediately without the operation of swinging it about 363 .

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, it becomes possible to force the lever member 340 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (Fig. 25(a) and 25(b), the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged because the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the imaginary line position to the solid line position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, damage to the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented. That is, the load from the lever member 340 is received by the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333, and damage to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate regardless of the direction of rotation, thereby allowing the lever member 340 to swing. Here, the characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

25(a) shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as the "retraction phase") when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24(a)). indicates the rotation angle of That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25(a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise by an angle φ1.

FIG. 25(b) shows the rotation angle from the phase (retraction phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24(a)). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25(b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise by an angle φ2. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1<φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracted phase will increase the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 333. can be shortened compared to when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (angle φ2).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state in which the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. and the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 abut in FIG. It can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 abut against each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut against each other is reduced. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated continuously in the same direction because there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 and operates it. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25(b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of angle φ2 in FIG. The distance from 331d1 to the abutting position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member is increased), so even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction approaching the lever member 340, the possibility of damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is reduced. can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of angle φ1 in FIG. The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocatingly rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 26(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung backward (clockwise in FIG. 26(a)) from the state in FIG. 24(b). 26(a), the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase, and the state in which the lever member 340 is swung until it abuts against the eccentric cam member 333 is shown. sight is omitted.

Here, when an operation to push down the lever member 340 exclusively is required while the lever member 340 is rocked by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26(a). Normally, the swing operation member 310 does not swing backward (clockwise in FIG. 26(a)). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed, it is possible to detect that the player has performed an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340 . Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is prevented from being damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26(b). can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26(b), the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is moved away from the lever support shaft 331d1. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 27(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has been pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. 27(b) shows a swing operation from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise about the pivot rod 363 is shown in FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 24(a), when a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. Next, from the state of FIG. 27(a), when a force is applied along the direction D2, which is the direction opposite to the direction D1, the swing operation member 310 is moved around the pivot rod 363 while the posture of the lever member 340 remains unchanged. can be oscillated. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating). can be made easier.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the fixed state is maintained by the attraction force of the magnet member 354), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operational feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the swinging operation member 310 is operated to swing, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, thereby rotating the lever member 340 in the direction opposite to that shown in FIG. 27(b). A load is applied in the direction of clockwise rotation. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed at the position shown in FIG. 27(a) when the swing operation member 310 is operated to swing, and the swing operation member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. can make it easier to

Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. FIG. In the first embodiment, the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed. The body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported are separate members. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the second embodiment, the torsion spring SP21 exerts an urging force in the direction to raise the lever member 2340, and the torsion spring SP22 exerts a biasing force in the direction to rotate the swing operation member 310 backward (clockwise in FIG. 28(a)). An urging force acts.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound around a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) and supported, with one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 2362 . In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swinging member 2360 in a backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341 .

FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 28(a) and 28(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336, and in FIG. 28(b) the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the pivot rod 363 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 28(a) is taken as the initial position, and in FIG. 28(a), the posture P21 to which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the recoil of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 is illustrated by imaginary lines. be done. Also, FIG. 17A shows the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, but since it has the same appearance as the operation device 2300, it will be regarded as the operation device 2300 and explained. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of electromagnetic force. A bobbin member 2366a which is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. and a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are coaxially arranged and connected by a disc-shaped plate. The pressing member 2366b has an inner cylinder made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the center axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is located on the front side of the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (a) left) are spaced apart.

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as the operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold it for presentation purposes. However, it is difficult to detect whether or not the player has gripped the swing operation member 310 . For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time. stress.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the pivot rod 363, so that the reaction to the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 reciprocates the swinging member 2360. The attitude of the swing operation member 310 changes between the attitude shown in FIG. 28(a) and the attitude P21 in a reciprocating manner. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21). ), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310 .

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the force of the grip, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so a signal is detected by the second sensor member 313d. pattern changes. By detecting this change, it can be detected that the player has already grasped the swing operation member 310 .

Since no reaction force is generated when the swing operation member 310 is held, the force required by the player is small. In addition, it is only necessary that the player's hand covers the swinging operation member 310 (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). Since it is only necessary to do so, the player's stress can be reduced.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not the player is in the operation preparation stage) without requesting the player to operate the push button, so the effect proceeds. The timing can be set to the timing when the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the player's stress caused by requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swinging member 2360 is used as a pivot, the vibration transmitted to the player side is increased by aligning the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation axis of the swinging member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). As a result, loosening of fastening screws and deterioration of members occur at an early stage, resulting in a problem that the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310. Vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the presentation effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d has a lock release shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28(a)) extending parallel to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

29(a) and 29(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 2300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position with the lock member 2336 placed on the release side. 29(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29(a) to the end of rotation in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 remains stationary until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344 .

When the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swinging range (see FIG. 29A) and a load is applied to the swinging operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swinging operation member 310, the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down. It rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally pushes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent loading.

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the unlocking cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the unlocking side (see FIG. 29(a)) are driven together. It is rotated by gear 335b. As a result, the second driving device 337 (see FIG. 10) can be dispensed with and the product cost can be reduced. The eccentric cam member 2333, unlocking cam member 2339, and locking member 2336 will be described below.

30(a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30(b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30(a). 30(c) is a front view of a body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30(d) is a side view of the body member 2333a viewed in the direction of arrow XXXd in FIG. 30(c). In addition, in FIG.30(c) and FIG.30(d), the main-body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the cam member 2333b includes a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circular portion inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 which extends in the axial direction along the length of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and which is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and has a hollow interior, and a pair of notches axially cut at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A notch 2333b3, a plate-like rib portion 2333b4 that connects the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and a protrusion provided from the rib portion 2333b4 parallel to the axis of the tubular portion 2333b1. It mainly includes a projecting portion 2333b5.

The projecting portion 2333b5 is a projection disposed at a position spaced radially from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and inserted into the annular recessed portion 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The projecting portion 2333b5 has side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30(a)) arranged in a manner that intersects the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and has a curved surface shape that conforms to a circular shape centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. formed by

The cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical idea is common, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30(c) and 30(d), the main body member 2333a has a shaft hole 2333a2 with a circular cross section which is supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 having gear teeth formed on its outer peripheral surface to mesh with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10), and a disc portion 2333a1 extending along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. , and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is annularly arranged along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The circular concave portion 2333a3 has a radius R22 that is the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the circular concave portion 2333a3, and has a radial width that is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In this embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to the deformation R21 (radius R21=radius R22). In addition, the recess depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is longer than the projection length of the projecting portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recessed portion 2333a3, when the projecting portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the cam member 2333b is disengaged from the lever member 2340. When subjected to an excessive load, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the projecting portion 2333b5 escapes from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, thereby suppressing deterioration due to the magnets rubbing against each other.

31A and 31B are views showing an assembly of the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31(c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. Note that FIG. 31(c) shows a state in which the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31(a). In D12(b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially shown in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), when the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the projecting portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the projecting portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in a mutually attracting direction. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can be rotated integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recessed portion 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load greater than the attraction force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. can let That is, as shown in FIG. 31(a), from a state in which the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b are aligned, the main body member 2333a By applying a rotational load to the fixed cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be shifted from each other as shown in FIG. 31(c).

Fig. 32(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, Fig. 32(b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as seen in direction XXXIIb of Fig. 32(a), and Fig. 32(c) ) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as seen in direction XXXIIc of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed in the same size as the body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof to mesh with the driving gear 335b. A portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the body portion 2339a and through which the lock release shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending radially outward along the front side surface of the body portion 2339a. A releasing portion 2339c formed with a length capable of coming into contact with the locking portion 2666d of the locking member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the releasing portion 2339c. 2339d and .

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between detection sensors (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33(b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 as seen in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG. 33(a).

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and has a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape on the distal end side, and a base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which a lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlocking cam member of the body portion 2336a. 2339 and a locking portion 2336d protruding above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface opposite to 2339 (left side in FIG. 33(b)).

The main body portion 2336a has an L-shaped hook-shaped tip, and when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that contacts the lever member 2340 from the lower side) contacts the lever member 2340, the force for rotating the lock member 2336 increases. It is considered as a mode.

The guide hole 2336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion that is pushed from the releasing portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). A torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 is always biased toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28(a)).

34 and 35 are front views of lever member 2340, eccentric cam member 2333, locking member 2336 and unlocking cam member 2339 illustrating in chronological order that lever member 2340 swings due to rotation of drive gear 335b. is.

FIG. 34(a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from rocking by the lock member 2336, and FIG. FIG. 34(c) shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34(b). 34(d) shows a state in which the unlocking cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34(c) and the lock member 2336 has returned to the fixed position.

FIG. 35(a) shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 is in contact with the lever member 2340 on the opposite side (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees) of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. 35(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35(a) and the lever member 2340 contacts the lock member 2336 from above, A state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when it is necessary to rotate the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 by an angle of θ21 until it comes into contact with the engaging portion of the locking member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 rotates at an angle of θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until it reaches the state shown in FIG. 34(b), the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronism with the unlocking cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34(a) (see FIG. 34(b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b is rotatable relative to the main body member 2333a, even if the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled with a phase shift, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled by the lever member. 2340 can prevent damage to the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10).

After the unlocking cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the unlocking cam member 2339 starts to move the locking member 2336 to the unlocking side, thereby releasing the restriction on the swinging of the lever member 2340. Rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are magnetically attracted to each other and rotate together.

When the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 slips out of the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34(d)), the rear end of the lever member 2340 is released regardless of timing. (Fig. 34(a) right end) presses the curved surface of the hook-shaped portion of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 toward the release side, and further lowering the rear end of the lever member 2340. , the oscillation is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the direction to lift it, and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 descends, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34(d), 35(a) or 35(b), the lever member 2340 is oscillated to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336, thereby restricting the oscillating movement.

Here, as a countermeasure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is made of an elastic material such as rubber so that the member is elastic. A possible method is to release the load by deformation. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagging or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). can prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIG. 34(d), FIG. 35(a), or FIG. 35(b)), the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (sliding relative to the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swinging is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, the posture of the cam member 2333b is the same (see FIG. 35(c)), but the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIG. 34(d), FIG. 35(a)). Or see FIG. 35(b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock release cam member 2339 moves the lock member 2336 to the release side again is different, which makes it difficult to determine the timing of starting the drive of the lever member 2340. was there.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 and the lock release cam member 2339 can be phased by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34(b)), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to easily match the timing of starting driving.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described. FIGS. 36(a) to 36(c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated as viewed in the axial direction of the pivot rod 363. FIG. Note that FIG. 36(a) shows a state in which the body member 2361 is pivotally arranged at the end of the backward roll side (see FIG. 28(a)), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is pivotally arranged (see FIG. 28(b)) is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which it is slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the body member 2361 is a member that is coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12) and is supported by the shaft support rod 363, and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. an elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c; and the fixed plate portion 361e extending from the upper end of the angle regulation hole 361d. and a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

As a result, unless the main body member 2361 is pivotally arranged at least at the end on the forward roll side, the pivot rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only the swing motion about the pivotal support rod 363 .

Next, referring to FIG. 37, motor fixing plate 2362 will be described. 37(a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37(b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 as viewed in the direction of XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a), and FIG. 37B is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37(b); FIG. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed in such a shape that the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b are extended rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. a pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the sides, a U-shaped member 2362d slidably disposed on the rod-shaped portions 2362c and formed with a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g; Mainly provide

The side wall portion 2362b has a long hole 2362b1 drilled along the extending direction of the body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged such that the crotch width of the U-shaped member 2362d is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is biased in a direction away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. , the pivotal support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is placed at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the pivotal support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

That is, by switching whether to apply a load to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether to allow the body member 2361 to move along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member for sliding the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, a plate-like first release member 2370 is disposed inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 is provided. A plate-like second releasing member 2380 is mainly provided so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the provided through hole.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so as to be slidable on the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 28(a)), and the second release member 2380 is arranged to slide along the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28(a)). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Also, in the first releasing member 2370, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first releasing member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. shape. The second release member 2380 is arranged such that the swinging operation member 310 is positioned downward and the swinging member 2360 is rotated to be positioned at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is positioned above the second release member 2380. It has a shape that abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29(b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29(a)) is slid, but the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29(a)) is slid. Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

Figures 38(a) and 38(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 2300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 38(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28(a) and placed in the downward position. 38(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has been slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38(a).

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and rotated to be arranged at the end of the swing in the forward direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid, and the swing operation member 310 can be slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is peeled off the peeling member 350, so that the swing operation member 310 is already overloaded, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, it can be determined that the player has not erroneously applied an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, but is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. can.

Therefore, for example, a detection sensor (not shown) detects that the state shown in FIG. and the operation device 2300 can be prevented from being destroyed.

If an excessive load is not applied to the swing operation member 310, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding. change can be prevented.

Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. In the first embodiment, the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. The driving force to move is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the third embodiment, the torsion spring SP31 exerts a biasing force in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward, and the torsion spring SP32 exerts a biasing force in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 falls forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound around the cushioning member 364 and supported, with one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345 c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362 . In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swinging member 360 in the upward direction with respect to the main body member 341 .

FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 39(a) and 39(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, and in FIG. 39(b) the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the pivot rod 363 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 39(a) is the initial position. Although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17(a), it is assumed to be the operation device 3300 and will be described since it has the same appearance. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operating device 3300 in this embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism, which will be described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic member 3339 made of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal bar member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. .

A lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345. A rod-shaped member 3345f made of metal is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a pair of U-shaped magnets extending from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the rear side (right side in FIG. 39(a)). In this embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the S pole. The lower surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the trajectory along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 swings, it is possible to prevent the bar member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 .

Here, for example, when a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 39(a), an electromagnetic force is generated to move the rod-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right in FIG. 39(a)). When a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-like member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39(a)). These electromagnetic forces can swing the lever member 3340 .

FIG. 40(a) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 3300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). FIG. 40(a) illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the biasing force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In this embodiment, the lever member 3340 is biased forward by the torsion spring SP1, so that the lever member 3340 can start swinging by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

As in this embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is biased in the direction of falling forward, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side where the lever member 3340 approaches when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is provided. Since it is necessary to arrange the cam member, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the player's operation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member is eliminated and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by a solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 that constitutes the solenoid mechanism is arranged in such a manner that there is a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f that constitutes the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Thus, damage to the solenoid mechanism can be suppressed when the player presses down the swing operation member 310 .

FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 3300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 40(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 39(b), and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are separated.

The biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40(b)). The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move upward and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged is the direction in which the player stands up, the lever member 340 separates from the separation member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged when the player applies an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 . Even if this can be prevented, the swinging operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so the player does not notice that the overload is applied, and the swinging operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of overshooting.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the lever member 3340 is biased is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly applying an overload to the swing operation member 310 .

In this embodiment, a rod-shaped member 3345f that receives an electromagnetic force that drives the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341 . That is, in a state in which the body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force, so that the body member 341 can be swung.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), if the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 will move the lever member. When the rocking movement of the eccentric cam member 333 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also restricted (see FIG. 18(a)). Therefore, when the rocking motion of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, if the eccentric cam member 333 operates, a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 restricts the rocking motion of the lever member 3340, the rod member 3345f receives electromagnetic force and moves, thereby allowing the main body member 341 to rock. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350 .

Therefore, even if an electric current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the locking member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for rocking the main body member 341, causing the peeling member 350 to rock. Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the locking member 336 from being damaged.

FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 41(a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 40(b) in the upward direction, and FIG. 41(b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41(a). , the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung by the movement of the rod-shaped member 3345f under electromagnetic force. Here, when an eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 moves from the peeling member 350. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is torn off (see FIG. 23(b)).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. Body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the body member 341 can be swung.

40(b) until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by an angle α31, current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(b). 41(a) until the posture of the transmission part 3345e changes by an angle α32 from the state shown in FIG. 41(a). The body member 341 can be brought into the state shown in FIG. 41(b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state shown in FIG. 41(a) and the state shown in FIG. 41(b). As a result, it is possible to perform a teasing action that draws the player's attention to the operation device 3300 .

In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is fixed to the body member 341 by suction (see FIG. 40A), by reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the player is directed to the operation device 3300. Action can be performed. At this time, the path along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is torn off from the main body member 341. It is possible to cope with the case where the peeling member 350 is peeled off and the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed to the main body member 341 .

Note that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, so that the strength is the same. Even if a small amount of current is applied, the speed of the fanning motion can be varied. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

Figures 42(a) and 42(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the swing operation member 310 is not cross-sectionally shown but is shown as a side view, and the player's hand is shown as an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding. .

FIG. 42(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is placed in a downward position and the player's hand is placed over the swing operation member 310 from the back side (the right side in FIG. 42(a)). From this state, an electric current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface of FIG. By swinging the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 42(a)). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by covering the swing operation member 310 with the hand, and the input operation can be facilitated. In addition, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the timing at which the swing operation member 310 on which the player's hand is placed swings in the forward rotation direction). can be controlled. Therefore, without requiring the player to perform an input operation, by placing the hand over the swing operation member 310 and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the back button 312d can be input on the control side. You can decide when to operate. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced, for example, when performing an effect requiring input with good timing.

42(a), the lever member 3340 is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 42(a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 42(a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of modes of operation of the operation device 3300, it is possible to designate an operation method for inputting with good timing, and allow the player to operate the operation device 3300 in an appropriate manner.

This is not possible with the configuration in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed rearwardly and downwardly of the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is positioned on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect can be achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

Next, an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the locking member 336 restricts the swinging of the lever member 340 with the swinging operation member 310 arranged in the upward position. Lock member 4336 restricts swinging of lever member 4340 in a state where swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. 43, illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 which are assembled into a box-like shape in which the lever member 4340 is arranged, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by a shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by a lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331 . The drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in this embodiment are slightly different from the first embodiment in their arrangement and attitude, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of cylindrical rod-shaped members 4331d projecting rightward from the upper side wall portion 331b.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is composed of a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the left cover member 4331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and arranged behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. and a lock shaft 4331d3.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 so as to be supported on both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 has a cam portion 4333c unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the eccentric cam has a larger diameter than the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a, and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c is closest to the lever member 4340, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of

The lock member 4336 is arranged in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 on which the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward, and the lock member 4336 is engaged with the lock receiving member 4350 from below. It is a member that abuts and restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 .

FIG. 44(a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44(b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44(a).

The lock member 4336 includes a body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b formed in a plate shape with a fan-shaped cross section and to which the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by meshing gears. , is mainly provided.

The body member 4336a includes a body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape, and a body portion 4336a1 which is perforated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44(a)) and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. a locking portion 4336a3 projecting above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b; and a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (the right side in FIG. 44(b)) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

The engaging portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm of the torsion spring SP41, which is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and whose one arm is engaged with the connecting side wall portion 331c (see FIG. 45). As a result, the body member 4336a is always biased counterclockwise in FIG. 44(b).

The concave portion 4336a4 is a portion that contacts the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. By setting the depth of the concave portion 4336a from the back side to be equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is placed in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45(a)). The posture of 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (main body member 4336a is held in a state of being in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b includes a main body portion 4336b1 having a fan-shaped cross section and a curved surface portion formed with a gear portion that meshes with the drive gear 337b, and a main body portion 4336b1 having a left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44(a)). A shaft support hole 4336b2 which is drilled and through which a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-like detection piece 4336b3 which passes through a gap in a sensor member (not shown) and can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b, and a main body. It mainly includes a protruding portion 4336b4 that protrudes from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and contacts the recessed portion 4336a4 in the swinging direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The projecting portion 4336b4 is formed at the rear side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction to approach the connecting side wall portion 331c, the rear side surface of the main body member 4336a swinging by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. can.

45(a) and 45(b) are side views of the locking member 4336. FIG. 45(a) and 45(b), the driving gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled state.

The lock member 4336 can configure a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45(a) and a forced lock release state shown in FIG. 45(b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

In addition, the forced lock release state is a state in which the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340 . In the forcibly unlocked state, the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts the recessed portion 4336a4 to hold the posture of the main body member 4336a.

In the lock standby state, if the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the body member 4336a from above, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47(a)). When the state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted is changed to the forced lock release state, the swinging restriction of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 is allowed to swing (see FIG. 48).

Here, by setting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and rotating the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 contacts the lock member 4336. As the end on the contacting side climbs over the lock member 4336, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted. On the other hand, by maintaining the forcibly unlocked state, it is possible to prevent the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. FIG. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 made of a metal material such as iron and shaped like a long rod with a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 supported coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, is mainly provided.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in such a manner as to compensate for the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a formed in the shape of a long bar with a U-shaped cross section and having a cutout on the left side of the rear end portion (the left side in FIG. 46), and the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a1. A rear main body portion 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section provided, and an electromagnet member M41 which is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body portion 4341a2 and attracts the rear main body portion 4341a2 and the front main body portion 4341a1 only when current is conducting. and a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the front body portion 4341a1.

The lock receiving member 4350 has a main body portion 4351 which is formed in a longitudinally elongated substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340. and a shaft hole 4352 that is bored in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear body portion 4341a2 can swing about the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

Figures 47(a) and 47(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 47(a) and 47(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, and in FIG. 47(b), the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the pivot rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 47(a) is the initial position. In addition, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17(a), it is assumed to be the operation device 4300 and will be described since it has the same appearance. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swinging operation member 310 is swung while the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted, and the back button member 312d is pressed. can be done.

In this embodiment, since the lock member 4336 abuts against the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. can be done.

The rear end of the lever member 4340 abuts against the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, thereby suppressing the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the forcibly unlocked state (see FIG. 45(b)). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 falls forward (leftward in FIG. 47(a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state in which the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 . Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to malfunction or the like while the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, damage to the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 can be prevented. can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked from the state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47(a)), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied. As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so the degree of freedom in rendering is reduced. There was a problem that

It is also possible to vary the operating speed by varying the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340, and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 with the rocking motion of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the timing for swinging the lock member 4336 toward the forcibly unlocked state is determined by the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49(a)). It is preferable to detect after

Here, the reaction to the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward falling direction. The rocking speed and rocking mode of the member 4340 can be changed (slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from erroneously colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

Figures 49(a) and 49(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 49(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 49(a) rightward) is illustrated, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

49(a) and 49(b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the forced lock release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player grips the swing operation member 310 and moves it up and down from the state of FIG. When the user releases the hand, the swing operation member 310 returns to the upward position due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

FIGS. 50(a), 50(b), 51(a) and 51(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 50(a), 50(b), 51(a), and 51(b) show how the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 in chronological order. be.

FIG. 50(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50(a) by about 90 degrees from the state in FIG. 50(a).

51(a), the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 50(b), and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 to restrict the rocking movement. 51(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51(a) to enter the retreat phase (see FIG. 50(a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50(a), 50(b), 51(a) and 51(b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the eccentric cam member 4333 swings the lever member 4340 to move the swing operation member to the downward position (initial position).

The lock member 4336 is in a lock standby state. In this case, the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336 to rotate the lock member 4336 in a backward falling direction (see FIG. 50(b)). On the other hand, the lock member 4336 is always urged in the forward tilting direction by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). side (see FIG. 51(a)). Thus, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340 , the lock member 4336 automatically restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 .

Therefore, even if the player does not know when to push down the swinging operation member 310, the rocking operation of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 by arranging the swinging operation member 310 in the downward position. can be done with certainty.

In the arrangement where the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51(a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 contacts the lever member 4340 . Therefore, in a state in which the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51(a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the same direction instead of being reversely rotated to return the eccentric cam member 4333. Member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, a detection device for detecting the timing of reverse rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 can be eliminated, and the first driving device 335 for driving the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily controlled.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50(a) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 reciprocatingly at an angle θ41 about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 can be rocked reciprocally at an angle θ42 about the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to perform a teasing action that draws the player's attention to the operation device 4300 .

At this time, the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and reciprocatingly rotated, thereby moving the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from the contact position to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep a long distance. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). can withstand).

In addition, by setting the lock member 4336 to the forcibly unlocked state, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly oscillated, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

FIG. 53(a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 4340 is a side view of a body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350. FIG. Note that FIG. 53(c) illustrates a state in which the front body portion 4341a1 has swung from the state of FIG. 53(a) in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the front body portion 4341a1 and the rear body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung unless a load greater than the attracting force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attracting force when current conduction is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front body portion 4341a1 and the rear body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53(c)).

54(a) and 54(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. Although FIG. 6 shows the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment have the same appearance, so the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment can be used as the pachinko machine. The description assumes that 4010 and operating device 4300 are shown.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the length of protrusion of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), the swinging operation member 310 projects forward by a distance X41 compared to the state shown in FIG. 54(b).

In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54(b). Selection based on the condition can make the box smaller. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight rod, if the power is turned off while the rocking is restricted by the lock member 4336, even if force is applied to the swing operation member 310 from the outside, the swing operation member will not move. 310 cannot be placed in an upward position, and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be placed in a packing box.

In addition, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned upward, the swinging operation member 310 is erroneously positioned downward. There is a problem that the oscillating operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in a state of being bent.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 integrating the body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 swings the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 in the upward direction. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged at the upward position during packing. Also, by turning off the power supply when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are independently driven has been described. synchronously driven. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 in the fifth embodiment. Note that the illustration of the right cover member is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a cylindrical lock release shaft arranged behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with the driving gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 supported by the locking shaft 4331d3.

56(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56(b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56(a), and FIG. 56(a) is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG. 56(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a substantially D-shaped cam portion 5333c in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f partially provided with a notch 5333f1.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front. and a buffer portion 5333c2 that has a low height and absorbs the impact from the lever member 4340. In this embodiment, the thickness of the rigid portion 5333c1 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 when viewed from the front.

A notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the driving gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when the driving gear 355b is arranged to face the driving gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 . Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 is driven. , there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

In the present embodiment, the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, so the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the body portion 333a (downward in FIG. 56(b)), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the driving gear 335b.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, FIG. 57(b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57(a), and FIG. ) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as seen in the LVIIc direction of FIG. 57(a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshing with the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. is formed, a shaft hole 5339b is drilled in the center of the body portion 5339a and through which the lock release shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the side surface of the front side of the body portion 5339a A releasing portion 5339c that extends and is formed with a length that can come into contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the locking member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Prepare the Lord.

The head portion 5339d has a notch 5339d1 partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. A notch 5339d1 of the head portion 5339d is a notch formed in a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b. It is a mark for aligning the initial phase of the unlocking cam member 5339 .

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the body portion 5339a (lower side in FIG. 57(b)), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the lock release cam member 5339 is inserted through the lock release shaft 5331d5, the lock release cam member 5339 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b.

That is, since the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted through the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only in a posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the driving gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct posture.

FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58(b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58(a). As shown in FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), the locking member 5336 is configured by a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a plate shape with a fan-shaped cross section. ) are not required.

The lock member 5336 includes a main body member 5336a formed in a long plate shape, and a main body member 5336a which is perforated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58(a)) and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. and a locking portion 5336c projecting above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the body member 5336a facing the unlocking cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58(a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. This is the portion pushed from the releasing portion 5339c of the .

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 and a curved wall portion 5336a1 curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the side that contacts the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. A protruding portion 5336a2 protruding along a circle centering on the shaft support hole 5336b is mainly provided from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 .

The projecting portion 5336a2 has a lower end surface inclined upward toward the tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the projecting portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

59(a) and 59(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336; FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restrained from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59(b) shows the driving gear 335b rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 59(a). The lock release cam member 5339 presses the lock member 5336 to release the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, and the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 59( a ) and 59 ( b ), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged when the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player performs an operation to swing the swing operation member 310 up and down, since the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric Collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

This is an unavoidable problem when restricting the swinging of the lever member 4340 with the swinging operation member 310 arranged in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). This problem is solved by restricting the swinging motion of the lever member 4340 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

Even if the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing control (see FIG. 59(b)) is mechanical. , the lever member 4340 can reliably come into contact with a specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (the position on the short diameter side, the position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

As shown in FIG. 59(b), when the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340 and the lever member 4340 contacts the eccentric cam member 5333, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 It assumes the position closest to member 4340 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the cam portion 5333c caused by the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

In addition, by arranging the cam portion 5333c on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swinging of the lever member 4340 immediately after the lock member 5336 is released from swinging the lever member 4340. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be ensured. That is, in the present embodiment, the rocking angle of the lever member 4340 ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is ensured. As a result, when the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, the upward movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17(b)) can be increased, and the swing operation member 310 has a dramatic effect. can be improved.

60(a) and 60(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336; In FIG. 60(a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. A state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid portion 5333c1, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be increased.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the driving device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam will collide with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not collide with the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 come into contact with each other, it is preferable to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to reduce the swinging speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the performance effect can be enhanced.

With synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid portion 5333c1 can come into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. Speed of action can be improved.

In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. , and the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked (see FIG. 48) in a state in which the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down. 4333 pushes up the lever member 4340 so that the lever member 4340 swings forward and the swing operation member 310 is placed in the downward position. Swinging can be regulated.

This suppresses the application of resistance from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly swung up and down (see FIG. 52). Driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the locking member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are synchronously controlled, the posture of the member (the unlocking cam member 5339 in this embodiment) that drives the locking member 5336 depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 . Therefore, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

For example, when the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the locking member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the locking member 5336 half a turn before the unlocking portion 5339c starts to push the locking member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the player's operation.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the swing operation member 310 is placed in the downward position by being operated by the player to swing the lever member 4340 forward. , restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 62).

However, if the lever member 4340 abuts against the lock member 5336 while being reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is reduced. It may become too large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed in the lock member 5336 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied from the lock member 5336 to the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

When the lever member 4340 swings forward from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the projecting portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is turned toward the unlocked state. 60(a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction to enter the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, the swinging direction of the lever member 4340 can be restricted at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth.

Note that the unlocking cam member 5339 transmits the driving force to the locking member 5336 only when the locking member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59(b)). Transmission is cancelled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocatingly oscillated, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with it, and it is possible to prevent troubles such as collision with the lever member 4340 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), until the lock member 5336 is placed at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is placed at the upward position (posture in FIG. 59(b)). to maintain

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously controlled, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59(b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60(a)). , the eccentric cam member 5333 may cause the lever member 4340 to swing. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In this embodiment, the rigid portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line contacting the outer circumference of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60(a)), so that the eccentric cam member 5333 can move at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. 59(b) to the figure). 60(a)), the gap between the rigid portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is filled, and the swinging of the lever member 4340 can be suppressed. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61(a) and 61(b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61(a) until the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. be.

As shown in FIG. 61( a ), the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the projecting portion 5336 a 2 of the lock member 5336 , thereby rotating the lock member 5336 away from the lever member 4340 . When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). , and the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 .

Until the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 escapes from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from.

In addition, since the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. can be ensured to be large, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) can be ensured to be large. Therefore, the lock member 5336 can reliably restrict the movement of the lever member 4340 .

62 is a schematic diagram of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the player pushes down the lever member 4340 from the state shown in FIG. 60(b) in a forward tilting direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), a circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c around the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 contacts the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) when the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and placed in the downward position. 62), the eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59(a)).

Note that even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. clockwise) to swing the lever member 4340, and the locking member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) to restrict the swinging of the lever member 4340. can be done.

As a result, regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 after the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, thereby securing the swing width of the lever member 4340. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

63(a) and 63(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. 6333, a schematic diagram of the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63(b) shows the drive gear 335b rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 63(a). The lock release cam member 5339 presses the lock member 5336 to release the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, and the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise).

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the lock release cam member 5339 contacts the lock member 5336, and the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. , and along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in an arrangement different from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), when the lock member 5336 is unlocked, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333 . Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the release timing of the locking member 5336 .

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64(a) and 64(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336;

In FIG. 64(a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. A state of abutting on the side surface is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 across the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 oscillates, the oscillation is blocked by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, since there is no risk of collision between the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload is generated when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. It is possible to shorten the period of time in which the state is arranged at the lower end). As a result, the period in which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64(a) can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing motion of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65(a) and 65(b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. 65(a) shows a state in which the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. be done.

65(b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated to push up the rear end of the lever member 4340, and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. As a result, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted.

In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 64B and the state shown in FIG. , and the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated vertically (tilting operation).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64(b) and 65(a), the unlocking cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the locking member 5336 (the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member is separated from the locking member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 5336 from applying resistance to the lock release cam member 5339, and stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, thereby rotating the lock member 5336 away from the lever member 4340. As shown in FIG. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 returns by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63(a)).

In addition, since the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. can be ensured to be large, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) can be ensured to be large. Therefore, the lock member 5336 can reliably restrict the movement of the lever member 4340 .

In the state shown in FIG. 65(a), let us consider the case where the player applies a load in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333, and the eccentric cam member 6333 rotates clockwise. In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are synchronously operated. The load applied may damage the eccentric cam member 6333 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end portion is lowered from the state of FIG. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 moves away from the locking member 5336 . Therefore, there is no fear that the unlocking cam member 5339 will abut against the locking member 5336 and the rotation will be restricted.

In this embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 are located at different positions (Fig. are placed in a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 rotate in the direction of approaching each other in FIG. 65(a) from the state of FIG. Since they do not pass each other, damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 always applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. A case where gear damper 7347 applies resistance to lever member 7340 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 66(a) and 66(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 66(a) shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and in FIG. Member 7350 is shown torn away.

As shown in FIG. 66( a ), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the body member 341 . The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on the insertion hole 352 formed in the body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are fixed by suction and swung together, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the peeling member 7350 is restrained from swinging by the lock member 336 and is pulled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (when the player is necked). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is applied to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) to the extent that the lever member 7340 is pulled off the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the sense of operation when the player operates the swing operation member 310, and encourage the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66(b), if the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate it, causing stress. If the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced, making it easier for the player to operate. Therefore, the more the player tries to avoid stress, the more he or she avoids applying an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 . This can prevent the operation device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330. However, as the lever member 340 swings, the inner case member 8330 can slide. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 67(a) and 67(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69 as well. Also, FIG. 67(a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 67(b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. .

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the inner case member 8330 has a plurality of long-hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc about the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in a corresponding position of a right cover member (not shown) provided as a pair with the left cover member 8331 in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 .

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, a first slide hole 8331i1 having a smooth inner surface and disposed on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and a smooth inner surface. and a second slide hole 8331i2 arranged closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is an elongated hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The attitude of the lock member 8336 changes the frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 arranged to slide along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331 . The lock member 8336 is a columnar portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f that penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 that is part of the axial direction and is inserted through the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is formed with a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a that are separated from the side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67(a)) when they are arranged to face each other. , and a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that come into contact with the side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 (see FIG. 68(a)) in a state of facing each other. It is configured in a curved diamond shape.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is positioned on the release side. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b is formed from a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is positioned on the fixed side. It is formed.

When the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2, and a predetermined gap is provided. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 can be suppressed.

Note that FIG. 67(b) illustrates a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount. Even in this state, there is a slight gap between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 is slightly rotated from the release side position, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so the rocking resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player can rock the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing can be shortened. can do. This makes it easier to dispose the lock member 8336 at a desired position on the fixed side.

The slide plate 8370 includes a protruding portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and protrudes into an arcuate cross-section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is made of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 in such a manner that the rotating shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that is rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare the Lord.

The projecting portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is made of a magnetic material and adhered to the peeling member 350 . With the magnet member 8372 adhered to the separation member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 is swung.

The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged in the release side position (see FIG. 67(a)) and the fixed side position (see FIG. 68(a)). drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370 , it slides together with the slide plate 8370 .

The peeling member 350 has a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface. It is possible to detect whether An example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described below.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67(a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23(b) and 16) is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 (see FIG. 23(b)), so that the lever It is detected that member 340 is positioned at the end of its swing range. In addition, in the state of FIG. 67(b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23(b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. detected to be present.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67(a) and the state shown in FIG. It is possible to detect repeated operations in the maximum vertical movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, and the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

As in the first embodiment, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging is fixed. It was difficult to fix 340 with locking member 336 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 8336 is movable following the lever member 340, so that the lock member 8336 stops the rocking motion of the lever member 340 even during the rocking motion of the lever member 340. It is possible to Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the locking member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. can be done. This will be explained below.

Figures 68(a) and 68(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 68(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned between the upward and downward positions, and FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is shifted by a predetermined amount or more from the state in FIG. 68(a). is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), by rotating the driving gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is engaged with the operation to push up the swing operation member 310. A slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains the posture in the state shown in FIG. 68(a) even if some load is applied in the vertical direction.

From the state of FIG. 68(a), when the player applies a downward load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged when a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is transmitted to the lock member 8336 .

As shown in FIG. 68(b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. However, contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 can prevent the lever member 340 from contacting the eccentric cam member 333 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so that the player can move the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, so the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. can.

Figures 69(a) and 69(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIG. 69(a), the lever member 340 and the stripping member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are shown by imaginary lines, and the stripping member 8336 is shown with the lock member 8336 disposed on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are illustrated by solid lines in a state in which the magnet portion 8372 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. In FIG. The state arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69( a ), when the lever member 340 and the stripping member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 , the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the stripping member 350 . At this time, if a downward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (it is decelerated by frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i), and the peeling The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see solid line portion in FIG. 69(a)).

In this case, the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 upward, the peeling member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may damage the eccentric cam member 333 .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350 . As soon as the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the separation member 350 and the magnet part 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69(b)). The upper surface of the locking member 8336 can be abutted against the lower surface of the member 350 .

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swinging operation member 310, the peeling member 350 contacts the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, and the downward force is applied. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the locking member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24(b)), the lock member 336 may be fixed side. , the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 side more than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state, , the stripping member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 . Therefore, the effect of preventing breakage of the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 to move in the same manner (the state where the peeling member 350 contacts both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). is maintained), by arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 , the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is positioned closer to the peeling member 350 than the eccentric cam member 333 . can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333 , and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333 .

It is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 when the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and the maximum diameter portion moves toward the peeling member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may cross the lock member 8336 and approach the peeling member 350. It's for.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a ninth embodiment will be described. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are all rigid bodies has been described. It has elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

70(a) and 70(b) are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is positioned downward, and FIG. 70(b) shows the swing operation member 310 facing downward in the state shown in FIG. 70(a). A load of a predetermined amount or more is applied, and a state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 70( a ) and 70 ( b ), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 that are arranged in the vicinity of the swinging operation member 310 as a pair of upper and lower coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to approximately the same length. In order to support the weight of the swing operation member 310 and maintain the state shown in FIG. The elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side is set higher than that of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(b), when a load greater than or equal to a predetermined amount is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member The relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 collapsed, and a load was applied to the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (separation member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the members inside the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) due to the load applied to the swing operation member 310. FIG.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. FIG. In the above embodiments, the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340. 2, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The operation device 10300 shown in FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 71(a), 71(b), 72(a) and 72(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in the tenth embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 10300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. 73 and 74 are similarly substituted.

71(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned upward, and FIG. 71(b) shows the eccentric cam member 2333 moving from the state shown in FIG. ), the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 71(a) to the angle θ101 in FIG. 71(a). 72(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance. be done.

In this embodiment, a torsion spring SP101 made of an elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swing operation member 310 downward.

As a result, the lever member 340 is always urged in such a manner as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333 , so that the lever member 340 can be operated following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 .

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 is moved by pushing down the swing operation member 310. Even if a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340 due to the lifting of the portion, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b slide to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, if the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 are in perpendicular contact with each other, the lever member 340 The load from the eccentric cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(a), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that contacts the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. is shifted by a predetermined angle from the rib portion 2333b4 (position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. can be slid Therefore, damage to the eccentric cam member 2333 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged rearwardly and upwardly of the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player erroneously lifts the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 moves away from the eccentric cam member 333. move in the direction Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340 .

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), a columnar member is arranged below the peeling member 350 to prevent the lever member 340 from swinging further (the posture shown in FIG. 71(a) is end position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71(b) to the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72(a) to the state shown in FIG. 71(b), the swing operation member 310 swings downward. By repeating clockwise and counterclockwise rotations of the eccentric cam member 2333 in this manner, the swinging operation member 310 can be reciprocated vertically (flashing motion). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. Also, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swing operation member is vertically reciprocated by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 be arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. It becomes easy to arrange the lever support shaft 331d1 on the player side (front side), whereby even when the notches 331c1 and 332c1 have the same length in the circumferential direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 is increased. can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the presentation effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72( b ), the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336 . Therefore, when a small load such as a player's hand is placed on the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

Figures 73(a), 73(b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 10300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIG. 73(a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged at the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73(b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 from the state in FIG. From the state of FIG. 73(b), the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the state in which the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown. is illustrated.

In this embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . As a result, a load is applied to the swing operation member 310, and when the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 and moved, it is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 of the eccentric cam member 2333 (see FIG. 73). (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to this embodiment, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is reduced. A portion is used to peel off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 . Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the downward direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). Accordingly, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Since it is necessary to do so (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a sense of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340, thereby performing the swinging operation. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (tilting motion).

This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of uneasiness that accompanies the destructive action of peeling off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 .

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, and the player can feel the operation. can be granted.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates at high speed. As a result, the player can be notified of the abnormality. For example, the characters "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the reciprocating motion of the lever member 340 up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 gives the player a reaction force to the operation. It can be used to provide a sense of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. The former case has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and the latter case has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched by changing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player is prompted to perform a predetermined operation or performs a predetermined operation. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an eleventh embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are not structurally linked. is increased by the pressing operation of the lens member 317 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

75(a) and 75(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 11300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. Further, FIG. 75(a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pushing load, and FIG. 75(b) shows the lens member 317 pushed from the state of FIG. 75(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the swinging operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a extends in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG. A pair of through holes are formed on both sides. Therefore, a through-hole is formed to extend from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 through the vibrating device 11366 . The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is made shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the pivot rod 363. As shown in FIG.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stopper 11314g inserted through the through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stopping portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted through the through holes of the pressing member 11366b, and is inserted through a pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and includes a pair of pinching portions 11314g1 that are shaped like leaf springs. .

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is placed at a position spaced apart from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75(a)), and when the lens member 317 is pushed (see FIG. 75(b)), the torsion spring It is arranged at a position sandwiching SP2. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to increase the resistance of the rocking motion centered on. That is, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, when the vibrating device 11366 operates, the vibration of the vibrating device 11366 is consumed as the driving force for swinging about the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation section, and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device 11366 transmitted to the player (Fig. 75(a) vertical direction) can be suppressed from decreasing.

In addition, while suppressing the swinging motion of the swing operation member 310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibrating device 11366 transmitted to the player is ensured so that the player can move the lens member 317 away from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 can cause the swing operation member 310 to swing.

Thus, the same vibrating device 11366 achieves the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of making the swinging operation member 11310 move more vigorously in the no-load state to attract the player's attention. can be made compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 increases the resistance of the swing operation member 11310. , the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361 d of the swing member 360 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

76(a) and 76(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 12300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. Further, FIG. 76(a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pushing load, and FIG. 76(b) shows a state in which the lens member 317 is pushed from the state of FIG. 76(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76( a ), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibrating member 12314 .

The intermediate frame member 12312 has a larger opening at the center of the bottom portion 312a than the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g extending downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a through the enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 . The pressing rod portion 12314g extends to a position where the tip thereof can abut against the regulation rod 365. As shown in FIG.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in an unloaded state (see FIG. 76(a)), and when the lens member 317 is pushed (see FIG. 76(b)), the regulating rod portion 12314g 365 is pushed. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulation hole 361d. In this state, the pivotal support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulating hole 361d, so that the swing operation of the swing operation member 12310 about the pivotal support rod 363 can be suppressed. That is, by pushing the lens member 317, the swinging resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, when the vibrating device 366 operates, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is consumed as the driving force for swinging about the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation section, and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device 366 transmitted to the player (Fig. 76(a) vertical direction) can be suppressed from decreasing.

In addition, while suppressing the swinging of the swinging operation member 12310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibrating device 366 transmitted to the player is ensured, so that the player can move the lens member 317 away from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can swing the swing operation member 12310 .

Thus, the same vibration device 366 achieves the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of attracting the player's attention by making the swing operation member 12310 move more vigorously in the no-load state. can be made compatible.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates the lever member 340, and during the rotation, the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. In the operation device 13300 of the thirteenth embodiment, while the lever member 340 rotates, the swing operation member 310 moves against the lever member 340 in the direction opposite to the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 . It is possible to construct a displaced state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 77 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, the operation device 13300 is arranged such that the swing operation member 13310 protrudes from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. FIG. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 disposed inside the outer case member 13320 .

As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 has a rear side formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and is attached to the inner case member 13330 from the front side to the right and left of the cover members 344 and 345. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 attached in a manner to hide the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are respectively provided with long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a that are drilled in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portions.

The long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the front left cover 13321 and the front right cover 13322, respectively. Even if the shapes vary, the lateral positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted. As a result, it is possible to reduce lateral displacement between the wall member 13322b fitted to the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

The front left cover 13321 and the front right cover 13322 are fastened and fixed in the long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 has a fitting recess 13322a recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 13322 that abuts against the left front cover 13321, and the fitting recess 13322a prevents slippage in the front-rear direction. and a wall member 13322b mounted in a manner such that, in a state where the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 so that the wall Member 13322b is retained within mating recess 13322a.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 13322b, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b receives the load from the posture correction device 13312 and is damaged). easy part). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. FIG. 79, illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support the lever support shaft 331d1 that supports the lever member 13340 and the eccentric cam member 5333. An eccentric cam shaft 331d2, a lock shaft 4331d3 on which a lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and a lock release cam member 5339 which is arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 and has a length shorter than that of the lever support shaft 331d1. and an unlocking shaft 13331d5.

A bent sheet metal member B13 is fixed to the tip of the lock release shaft 13331d5 by being fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331. As shown in FIG. As a result, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be pulled out from the unlocking shaft 13331d5.

Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed to be shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is not provided at the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not provided (the portion to the right of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating , it is possible to avoid interference between the unlocking shaft 13331d5 and the lever member 13340.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332 which are assembled into a box shape in which the lever member 13340 is arranged, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , a first driving device 335 , a locking member 5336 , a gear damper 338 and an unlocking cam member 5339 .

FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. FIG. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the rear side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the attitude detection member 343 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. is illustrated.

The back-side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruded tip, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17(b)). )reference). An insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening, is provided in the recessed portion. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 includes a main body member 13341 made of a metal material such as iron and shaped like an elongated bar with a U-shaped cross section, a gear damper receiving member 342, and a gear damper receiving member 342 coaxial with the gear damper receiving member 342. , an upper cover member 344, a lower cover member 345, an angle regulating rod member 346, and an oscillating member 360 disposed at the front end of the body member 341. Prepare the Lord.

81 is a front exploded perspective view of the body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345 and the swing member 360 of the lever member 13340. FIG.

A body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 includes a body portion 13341a formed in a long bar shape with a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the body portion 13341a, and a regulating hole. A hole 341c, a pair of swinging member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e, a regulation hole 341f, and an eccentric cam member 5333 and a lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) which are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. and a contact member 13341g to be contacted.

The contact member 13341g contacts the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface, and contacts the lock member 5336 at the rear side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. FIG. The oscillating operation member 13310 includes a disk-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360, and a back-side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 disposed inside the rear side frame member 13311 and having a portion projecting from the inside to the outside, and a flange sandwiched between the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. A front cover 13313 and a rear cover 13314 which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front and rear direction, It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

The posture correction device 13312 includes an abutment member 13312a projecting outward from a guide hole 13311b of the rear side frame member 13311, and a support member 13312b disposed between the abutment member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. and a hook member 13312c that protrudes inward from the hook insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and has a hook-shaped portion that fits with the locking protrusion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

The contact member 13312a includes a straight-rod-shaped projecting portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 projecting from the projecting portion 13312a1 in the left-right direction in a flange shape.

The protruding portion 13312a1 is a portion that protrudes outside the guide hole 13311b of the rear side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extension wall 13311c of the rear side frame member 13311 to extend the contact member 13312 further. This is the part that prevents it from sticking out.

The front cover 13313 is provided with a concave locking recess 13313a opened rearward below the fastening position with the rear cover 13314 (backward in FIG. 82).

The separation prevention cover 13315 has a receiving recess 13315a that is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 and configured to receive the protective cover 13316 in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). It is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured such that a rod that is drilled and inserted therein can be fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 83 shows the method of assembling the front cover 13313, rear cover 13314, separation prevention cover 13315 and protection cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83(a) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and rear cover 13314. 83(b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83(c) is the front cover 13313, the rear Fig. 13 is a cross-sectional view of cover 13314, separation prevention cover 13315 and protection cover 13316;

As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83(a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are fixed, and in FIG. 83(b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. is added, and FIG. 83(c) shows a state in which a protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the opposing wall portions with fastening screws N13a. As shown in FIG. 83(b), a separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83(b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is irremovably fixed.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a so as to cover the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right in FIG. 83(c)) so that it cannot be pulled out). , and the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) are fastened and fixed to the rear side frame member 13311 so that the upper side surface of the rear side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316. As shown in FIG.

With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions such as partially disassembling the operation device 13300 and passing wires through it.

That is, when the fastening screw N13a must be removed to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 13315. FIG.

Furthermore, in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13b must be removed. is abutted against the rear side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, it is necessary to remove the rear side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13. 13322 are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side becomes narrow. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, thereby preventing fraud.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the rear side frame member 13311 will be described. 84(a) is a perspective view of the rear side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84(b) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. ), and FIG. 84(c) is a sectional view of the rear frame member 13311 taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84(b).

As shown in FIG. 84, the rear side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (FIG. 84(c) left-right direction) below the insertion hole 311a. ), a wall-shaped extended wall 13311c extending laterally outward beyond the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the rear-side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. and a hook insertion hole 13311e vertically drilled at the end of the guide bottom wall 13311d opposite to the guide hole 13311b. , and a pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b from the end of the extension wall 13311c.

As shown in FIG. 84(c), the hook insertion hole 13311e has a side surface on the side of the guide bottom wall 13311d that slopes away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. This inclination secures a contact area between the hook member 13312c and the inclined contact portion 13312c3, which will be described later, and can prevent the guide bottom wall 13311d from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

The support member guide wall 13311f is formed such that the upper end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 84(a)) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

Next, referring to FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c will be described. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, and FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85(b) is the direction of arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85(c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a), and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of the hook member 13312c taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member configured in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. A hook portion 13312c2 provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall projecting outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in such a manner that a portion of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is the same as the inclination angle of the hook insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the rear side frame member 13311.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, the support member 13312b will be described. The support member 13312b is made of a hard resin and is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction when viewed from above. 86(b) is a top view of the support member 13312b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a), and FIG. 86(c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b taken along line LXXXVIc-LXXXVIc in FIG. 86(b). be.

As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, and a pair of plate-like abutment plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the body portion 13312b1. , and a locking projection 13312b3 projecting in the thickness direction from the end of the main body 13312b1, and a viewing hole 13312b4 vertically drilled at the intersection of the main body 13312b1.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in a region surrounded by the body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

When the body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peep hole 13312b4. can be prevented.

Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 and 88 show how the posture correcting device 13312 is attached to the back side frame member 13311 in chronological order.

87(a) is a partial top view of the rear side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 87(c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87(d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87(c). 87(e) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87(d).

88(a), 88(c) and 88(e) are partial top views of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88(b) is FIG. 88(a). 88(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(c), and FIG. 88(f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88(e).

A method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correcting device 13312 is moved along the guide bottom wall 13311d to the rear side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b). ), the tip of the body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted through the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left of the support member 13312b, but since it is post-mounted, there is a space in the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b. The space on the left side) can be widened, and the insertion of the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b can be facilitated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 87(e), the abutting member 13312a is attached to the rear side frame member 13311 in such a manner that the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (blocked) by the extended wall 13311c of the rear side frame member 13311. is placed inside the

In the states shown in FIGS. 87(c) to 87(e), the coil spring SP13 is contracted from its natural length. That is, a rightward load is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves leftward.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), the hook member 13312c is inserted into the hook insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 from the state shown in FIGS. 87(c) to 87(e). It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (lower side in FIG. 88(b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88(d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311. Therefore, if the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be assembled or if the hook member is damaged and falls off, the appearance of the These defects can be detected by inspection.

As shown in FIGS. 88(c) and 88(d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts against the lower surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d. 88(f), the support member 13312b is moved to the left by the hook member 13312c by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the leftward movement of the support member 13312b is caused by the hook member 13312c). is prevented), and the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted by covering the locking convex portion 13312b3 with the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c from above.

That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the rear frame member 13311 by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 as shown in FIGS. 88(e) and 88(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side frame member 13311 from the inside of the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 prevents the upward movement of the support member 13312b. In the case where the hook-like portion for blocking upward movement from the frame member 13311 is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-like portion. also need to be moved.

In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, and the function of the posture correction device 13312 may be hindered. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is important, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it is necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, to double the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 will increase accordingly (for example, double), and the force will be weak. Assembly is difficult for workers.

On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is different from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state, regardless of the distance the support member 13312b is moved when the hook member 13312c is assembled. by displacement. Therefore, by reducing the distance by which the support member 13312b is moved, it is possible to assemble with a smaller force and secure a large holding force. In this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

When removing the posture correcting device 13312, the front end of the support member 13312b (the left end in FIG. 88(f)) is moved in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, thereby disengaging the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b. The hook is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311 respectively.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88(f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) of the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311. It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and it is necessary to apply force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. This prevents the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back-side frame member 13311, or from illegally removing the support member 13312b or the hook member 13312c.

In addition, in order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88(f)), the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are in close contact with each other. need to let Therefore, it is necessary to strictly manage the dimensional relationship. (The back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88(f)) and the locking projection 13312b3 come into contact with each other, and the supporting member stops halfway.

In the present embodiment, by concentrating force on the concave portion 13312c5 provided in the hook member 13312c, the hook member 13312c is deformed with a relatively small force, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 becomes the locking projection. It can be pushed inside the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

In addition, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 until it is pressed against the wall on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of inserting the wire from the hook insertion hole 13311e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the function of posture correction device 13312 will be described. Figures 89(a) and 89(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 13300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 89(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. .

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (the linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363 and in which the vibrating device 366 is displaced) A case will be described where the player sets the operation direction U13a in which the player pushes the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction). Note that the smaller the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed without turning back).

By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates and rotates the lever member 13340 to the downward position shown in FIG. 89(b).

Here, as shown in FIG. 89(b), when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position and a straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position.

Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes an angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the projecting portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a abuts against the wall member 13322b, and the lever member 13340 is swung. The member 13310 is rotated by an angle θ13y clockwise in FIG. 89(a). The angle θ13y is set to the same angle as the angle at which the body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

By rotating the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340, the moving direction of the lens member 13317 is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the directions Y13a and Y13b is the angle θ13y). Therefore, in a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is made smaller). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in operational feeling and a situation in which it is difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317 .

In this embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310 . Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is arranged inside the lever member 13340 .

In addition, since the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. By doing so, it is possible to easily suggest the timing of pressing the lens member 317 to the player. That is, for example, by displaying a message such as "Press" on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with the timing when the swinging operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol is displayed. The display on the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340. 13340 is rotated counterclockwise (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89(b), a load is generated that rotates the swing operation member 13310 clockwise in FIG. 89(b)). Therefore, the force generated by the attitude correction device 13312 to change the attitude of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force to brake the lever member 13340 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating excessively and causing the rear end portion of the lever member 13340 (the right end portion in FIG. 89(b)) to collide with the inner case member 13330 .

The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut on the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 attempts to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotates from the state of FIG. 89(b)). are placed in a good position. As a result, even when the player applies an excessive load to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation axis of the lever member 13340 to the swinging operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and to rotate the swinging operation member 13310 by the meshing rotation of the gear group. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 contacts the wall member 13322b to change the attitude of the swing operation member 13310. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the elastic force (torsional displacement) of the torsion spring SP2 that biases the swing operation member 13310 is , is larger when placed in the downward position. At the downward position, a force is applied from the attitude correcting device 13312 to the swinging operation member 13310 in such a manner as to rotate the swinging operation member 13310 in the direction opposite to the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP2.

Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 to prevent relative displacement with respect to the lever member 13340 is greater when the swing operation member 13310 is positioned downward than when the swing operation member 13310 is positioned upward. will be larger in the state that is placed in Therefore, a state (upward position) that produces a feeling of operation with a small (light) rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 and a state (a downward position) that produces a feeling of operation with a large (heavy) rotational resistance. can be formed.

For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swinging operation member 13310 is placed in the upward position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak and the swinging operation member 13310 is pushed back by the reaction force of the torsion spring SP2. On the other hand, when the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member 13310 can be operated to hit the lens member 13317. By increasing the rotation resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be hardened against the lever member 13340. For example, when the lens member 13317 is hit continuously, failure to hit can be suppressed. .

It should be noted that the change in the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in this embodiment is caused by the change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action does not change depending on the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a change in posture of the swing operation member 13310 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. Figures 90(a) and 90(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 13300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 90(a) and 90(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, and in FIG. 90(a), the contact member 13312a is in contact with the wall member 13322b. 90(b), force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 has been pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted. , a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is constructed in a manner that allows it to contract. In addition, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated by the coil spring SP13 affects the displacement. Since it increases in proportion, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the swing operation member 13310 .

In this embodiment, since the pivot rod 363, which is the rotating shaft of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged in the directions Y13a and Y13b in which the lens member 13317 is pushed, the load pushing the lens member 13317 causes the swing operation member to move. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force that rotates the 13310 .

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is always changed when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position. It is possible to switch between a case where the swing operation member 14310 changes its posture and a case where it does not change its posture when the operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

91(a) is a front view of the locking member 14336 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 91(b) is a side view of the locking member 14336 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91(a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the locking member 14336 has a vertically elongated rod shape and includes a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a projecting portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. and a locking member 14336c that is configured to be movable in the retracting direction.

The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and has a biasing spring SP14a disposed between itself and the main body member 14336a. placed in a accessible position. The locking member 14336c has a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering the upper surface.

Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92(a)) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92(a)). 91(b)), and when contacting from a position other than the upper side (for example, from the front side (from the left side in FIG. 91(b))), the locking member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c. .

The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a). FIG. 92(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 14300 taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a cylindrical portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92(a)), and an umbrella portion. 5333f and .

The cam portion 14333c has a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. and a projecting portion 14333c2 projecting from the end of 14333c1.

The projecting portion 14333 c 2 has a circumferential side surface that is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 . Therefore, when the projecting portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force that presses the projecting portion 14337b1 is not only the circumferential force of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension part 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The attitude of the main body member 14337a is maintained at the intermediate position by applying elastic force to the main body member 14337a and the end of the main body member 14337a. and an elastic device 14337d for

The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft support 14337c can protrude from the inner case member 14330 . In the state shown in FIG. 92(a), the body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (a positional relationship in which the body member 14337a touches at a distance of 0) in which even if it contacts the swing operation member 14310, it cannot apply a load.

The extending portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92(a)), and is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft supporting portion 14337c so as to be able to abut on the projecting portion 14333c2. 92(a) is provided with a projecting portion 14337b1 projecting toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 92(a). Here, the protruding portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the protruding portion 14333c2 in the state shown in FIG. 95(b)), it is disposed at a position outside the movement locus of the projecting portion 14333c2.

The elastic device 14337d has a case fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion that abuts on the main body member 14337a is recessed in a doglegged shape. Configured. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, it can be returned to its position by being converged in the dogleg-shaped recessed portion when the rotational force is removed.

FIG. 92(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 14300 taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 92(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92(a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise, thereby rotating the lock member 14336. , a state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the upward position. 92(a) to 92(b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted and the guide hole drilled for the posture correcting device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to protrude as compared with the thirteenth embodiment. A rear side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that 13311b is closed is disposed on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310 .

Figures 93(a) and 93(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 14300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 93(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92(b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position. 93(a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 93(b), the state of FIG. 92(a) is restored.

That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. Move while maintaining your posture.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94(a) to 94(c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. Note that FIG. 94(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is moved closer to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 than the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in FIG. 94(b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state immediately after the contact between the projecting portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 is released.

As shown in FIG. 94, in this embodiment, compared with the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the projection 14333c2 and the projection 14337b1 are rotated in a state where the rotation angle of the extension 14337b is small. can be released from contact with

That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extended portion 14337b continues to rotate until the projecting portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the projecting portion 14337b1 can escape between the projecting portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94(b)). 94(b) to the state shown in FIG. 94(b), the contact between the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 can be released (see FIG. 94(c)). Therefore, the area where the extended portion 14337b resists the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

95 and 96, FIGS. 95(a), 95(b), 96(a) and 96(b) show the 14300 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. FIG. In FIG. 95(a), the swinging operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position, and the projecting portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the projecting portion 14337b1 of the posture switching device (see FIG. 95(a)). 92(a)), and in FIG. 95(b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 96(a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95(b). 96(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96(a).

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the posture switching device 14337 (FIG. 95(b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. can be done.

95(b), when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. As shown in FIG. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337 and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship such that they do not come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, although the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the driving force from being transmitted at the same time. can be done.

Since the upper side surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 (the side surface in contact with the projecting portion 14337b1) is inclined with respect to the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the projecting portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 The force that presses the projecting portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load caused by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). can be made Therefore, the load in the rotational direction on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96(b), the state shown in FIG. 95(a) is restored. At this time, since the unlocking cam member 5339 abuts against the locking member 14336 from above, the engaging member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the locking member 14336 is retracted, and the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is prevented. Being disturbed is prevented.

As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the attitude of the swing operation member 14310 is changed in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 at a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be looser than when a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310 (there is a slight idling). However, it can be made to cause no change in appearance).

Here, the time from the state shown in FIG. 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. 95(b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 is 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. 92(b) at the same timing after driving the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79), Either change from the state to the state of FIG. 95(b) can occur.

For example, the time from the state of FIG. 95(a) to the state of FIG. 95(b) is longer than the time from the state of FIG. 92(a) to the state of FIG. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95(a) to the state shown in FIG. ) to the state of FIG. 92(b), it is impossible to determine what action the swinging operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swinging operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, whether the change from the state shown in FIG. 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. It may be impossible to determine whether a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95(b) occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 mesh with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by separate drive gears. In this case as well, the time from when one of the drive motors is operated until the swinging operation member 14310 starts to swing with respect to the lever member 13340 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 92(a)) and the lever A similar effect can be obtained by adjusting the time until the member 13340 starts rotating clockwise in FIG. 92(a).

In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor that takes longer time is rotated first, and the second drive motor that takes shorter time is rotated later, and then the motor is rotated first. By stopping the driven first driving motor (the player can still feel the vibration of the second driving motor during this period), the player can feel the vibration of the first driving motor, which lasts a long time, while the second driving motor is stopped. 2 driving motors can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97(a) to 97(c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 begin to abut, and FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of (b) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 97, the upper side surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is inclined away from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d as it approaches the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface. The displacement caused by the movement moves the protruding portion 14337b1 in the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component of the load in the axial radial direction becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 has resistance in the circumferential direction.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 97(c), the load applied from the projecting portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a is driven. Even when the power is turned off, the load from the projecting portion 14337b can be resisted. Therefore, power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described. It is possible to construct a state in which it is pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

98(a) and 98(b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98(c) is a rear side frame at the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line in FIG. 98(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along line LXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId in FIG. 98(c).

FIG. 98(a) shows a state (locked state) in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the projecting member 13312a1, and FIG. state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b), the abutment member 15312a includes a bar-shaped projecting member 15312a1 whose end is deformable, and a projecting member 15312a1 having a T-shaped cross section. and a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the flange member 15312a2.

The projecting member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformation portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the body portion 15312a11 in the width direction. Prepare. A connecting portion between the body portion 15312a11 and the deformation portion 15312a12 is cut so as to be easily deformed. Fits inside the width in the short direction of 15312a11.

The flange member 15312a2 has a base portion 15312a21 formed with a dimension that fits between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f, and the distance between the connecting portions of the main body portion 15312a11 and the deformation portion 15312a12 of the member 15312a1 extending from the base portion 15312a21. A projecting portion 15312a22 projecting with a short width is mainly provided.

With such a configuration, when the projecting portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98(a)) in which it projects outward. When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the projecting member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98(b)) in which the deformation portion 15312a12 is tapered inward.

98(c) and 98(d) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side outer frame member 13311. FIG. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is made shorter than its natural length, it is possible to generate a load from the coil spring SP13 to embed the flange member 15312a2 into the projecting member 15312a1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98(d), the abutment member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformation portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and the illegal pulling out of the overhanging member 15312a1.

99(a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture corrector 15312 along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 taken along line LXXXIXb.

99(a) and 99(b) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the rear side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid into the space occupied by the hook member 13312c. .

In the state shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), since the coil spring SP13 is longer than its natural length, no force is generated to press the flange member 15312a2 against the projecting member 15312a1, and the deformed portion 15312a12 loses its shape. By returning (returning to the state of FIG. 98(b)), the contact member 15312a is pulled out. As a result, the projecting member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 (the right side in FIG. 99(b)).

That is, the projecting member 15312a1 can be replaced only by laterally sliding the support member 13312b without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. FIG. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it is a portion that is likely to be damaged due to collision with other members. A certain projecting member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the support member 13312b is moved by dropping the hook member 13312c. When a large load is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c so as to cause the hook member 13312c to break and fall off, the contact member 15312a can be prevented from being similarly damaged.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the abutment member 15312a can be pulled out, so that replacement can be performed quickly. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times, which is weighted in consideration of safety, and the hook member 13312c falls off. Thus, it is possible to determine when to replace the abutment member 15312a with the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. In addition, when the hook member 13312c is removed, the projecting member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that replacement can be easily performed and maintenance performance can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 100, the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Although the case where the operational feel of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, the operation device 16300 according to the sixteenth embodiment additionally changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310, thereby changing the operation of the swing operation member 16310. It is possible to change the feeling. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 100(a) to 100(d) are side views of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 100(a) to 100(d) show an external view of the swing operation member 16310, a schematic cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340, and a schematic representation of other parts. Illustrated by lines.

FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the upward position, and FIGS. 100(c) and 100(d) show the swing operation member 16310 facing downward. It is shown in position. 100(a) and 100(c) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward roll side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100(a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. 100(b) and 100(d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the end of movement on the backward roll side (clockwise direction in FIG. 100(a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the rear side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, and the fastening portions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 (see Fig. 82) and a lens member 13317.

The separation prevention cover 16315 is attached to the wall surface of the rear side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 100(a)) from the bottom end of the disk portion, and the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82). an extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d disposed in a long groove shape on the side surface of the extension portion 16315c facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313, and the inside of the long groove 16315d and an iron ball 16315e movably arranged.

The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e disposed therein by gravity. distance is shortened.

Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the end on the forward roll side to the end on the backward roll side is 10 degrees (θ13y=10 degrees), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100(a) to be less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (right and left direction in FIG. 100(a)) (θ16a<24 degrees), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 16310 (the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d can be maintained) can be done). In addition, in this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

The iron ball 16315e is an iron spherical member that can bear most of the weight of the swing operation member 16310 . Therefore, by moving the iron ball 16315e, the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 changes.

As shown in FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b), when the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is positioned at the pivot rod 363. 100(c) and 100(d), when the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is placed at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity The position is made far from the pivot rod 363 .

That is, the distance from the pivot rod 363 to the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is placed at the downward position, the center of gravity position is farther from the pivot rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is placed at the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310 is increased. (Fig. 100(c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

Therefore, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100(c) and 100(d)), the player pushes the lens member 13317 to move the swing operation member 16310 forward. After rotating in the direction of rotation (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100(d) to the state of FIG. 100(c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated by the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100(c) ) from the state of FIG. can be).

As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 against the lever member 13340 is equal to that of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. , and when the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position, it is possible to increase the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(c)). . In this case, the time from when the player hits the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 enters the state shown in FIG. 100(c) until it returns to the state shown in FIG. 100(c), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 can be maintained even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (in case of repeated hits), and the state of FIG. 100(c) can be immediately changed. As compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG.

In addition, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100(a). Since the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is rotated is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced compared to the case of counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 100(a).

On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. Rotational resistance can be reduced compared to the clockwise rotation in FIG. 100(c).

Therefore, the direction in which the rotation resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the upward position. can be reversed.

According to this embodiment, the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to a change in the state inside the swing operation member 16310) changes the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced compared to the case where the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a directional load.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feel of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to changes in the amount of twist of the torsion spring SP2 has been described. and the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 101(a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 101(b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. . 101(a) and 101(b) show a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and the swinging operation member is attached to the lever member 13340, respectively. A state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward roll side is illustrated.

In this embodiment, an oscillating member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the oscillating member 360 in the first embodiment. The oscillating member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed so as to rub against the wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (see Figure 81).

The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

Also, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, a wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b has an extension 17322b1 extending upward from its upper end.

As shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b), the extended portion 17322b1 does not contact the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the friction arm 17362c is formed in a manner of contact. That is, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the extended portion 17322b1 has a contact surface that is pressed against the distal end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. It is formed in an arc shape with 363 as the center. As a result, it is possible to secure a contact area between the extended portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c, thereby exerting a sufficient dynamic frictional force. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 is increased by the dynamic frictional force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 is also increased.

Since the change in the operational feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340 , the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340 . Therefore, regardless of whether the swing operation member 13310 is operated by swinging it at high speed or when the swing operation member 13310 is operated slowly, once the tip of the lever member 13310 is placed in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 will not move. Since the same dynamic friction force can be applied to the rotation of , it is possible to reliably produce a change in operational feeling.

In addition, since the dynamic frictional force changes depending on the pressing force and does not change depending on the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm 17362c is pressed against the extension 17322b1. Sufficient dynamic frictional force can be generated even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, at the beginning of rotation).

In this embodiment, since the extension part 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, the members that need to be replaced when the extension part 17322b1 is damaged can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. can. Therefore, replacement of the wall member 17322b can be facilitated, and maintainability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, an eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described. is transmitted to the swing member 18360, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 102(a) to 102(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 102(a) to 102(c) illustrate a state in which the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the illustration of the torsion spring SP2 is omitted, and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) is shown. ) is removed. Also, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated forward with respect to the lever member 18340 is illustrated.

The operating device 18300 in this embodiment includes a swinging member 18360 that is disposed inside the swinging operating member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swinging operating member 13310, and a lever member 18340 that pivotally supports the swinging member 18360. , at least as portions different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The swing member 18360 includes a body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a buffer member 364. , a regulating rod 365 and a vibration device 366 (see FIG. 81).

The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102(a)). A rubber band RB capable of producing a load in the pressing direction is wrapped around the thin wall portion 18362c.

The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member made of a rubber material, and both ends are immovably fixed with pins around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when rotating the swing operation member 13310, sliding friction is generated between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

The lever member 18340 includes a body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by contact with an eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The main body member 18341 sandwiches a long hole 18341h extending obliquely with respect to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and the extending direction of the long hole 18341h in the side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a having a U-shaped cross section. and a pair of guide walls 18341i arranged in parallel in a manner. The long hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB, as shown in FIG. 102(a).

The transmission device 18347 has a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion inserted through the long hole 18341h and having a size capable of sliding between the guide walls 18341i, and is pivotally supported by the lower end of the push-in portion 18347a. and an overhanging portion 18347c that overhangs from the lower end of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in this embodiment). In this embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102(a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the projecting portion 18347c) by a biasing spring (not shown) against the pushing portion 18347a.

In this embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide 18241b are arranged in a positional relationship in which the adjustment portion 18347b collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. A wall portion 18341i is provided.

By extending the projecting portion 18347c beyond the pivotal support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction approaching the projecting portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easily rotated with respect to the pushing portion 18347a and a direction in which it is difficult to rotate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102(a) from the state of FIG. The portion 18347a does not move along the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102(b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102(a) from the state of FIG. 18341h, the driving force is used to move the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102(c)). In this case, the push-in portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, so that the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are brought into closer contact with each other, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. . Accordingly, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 appears to be in the downward position, the direction of rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to operate or stop the transmission device 18347. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 103, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case where the load generated by the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described. Lever member 19340 can also be affected. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 103(a) and 103(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position, and in FIG. 103(a), the swing operation member 13310 is A state in which no force is applied is illustrated, and in FIG. 103(b), a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 by the player and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103(b)). illustrated.

The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that only the engagement protrusion 19345e is provided projecting from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment. The locking projection 19345e is arranged at a position on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in this embodiment, instead of the inner case member 13330, an inner case member 19330 is provided. The inner case member 19330 is constructed in such a manner that a transmission device 19337 is added inside the inner case member 13330 .

The transmission device 19337 includes a rotating lever 19337b which is supported by a rotating shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and has an L-shaped cross section, and a rotating lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 which rotates in the direction of rotation (Fig. 103(a)). ) and a torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force in the counterclockwise direction.

When the rotating lever 19337b is positioned at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103(a)), the rotating lever 19337b has a posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that contacts the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331, and a posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 is bent and the rotating lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the biasing direction, the tip portion contacts the contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 of the left front cover 13321 and the surface position. and a contact portion 19337b2 disposed in the . In this embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and an opening is also formed in the inner case member 19330, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are connected inside the opening. and can be brought into contact with each other.

With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340 . Details are given below.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position without the player applying a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). ), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (resulting in the state of FIG. 103(a)). In this state, the rotating lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and no load is transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotating lever 19337b can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), when the player performs an operation to rotate the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. , the abutment member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. As shown in FIG. In this case, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking protrusion 19345e in the rotating direction, the lever member 19340 is caused to react in the rotating direction (Fig. 103(b) clockwise rotating motion) via the rotating lever 19337b. ) can be suppressed.

Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction in which the lever member 19340 is raised by the recoil, and the rear end of the lever member 19340 is pushed downward. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12(b)). load can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 increases and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. (See FIG. 77), the rotating lever 19337b can contact the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied. Rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be kept low.

As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, the rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased when an overload is applied, thereby allowing the locking member 5336 (see FIG. 89(b)) to operate. The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correcting device 13312 that rotates the swing operation member 13310 in the direction in which the swing operation member 13310 is raised has been explained. It is configured as a device that operates automatically. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 104(a) and 104(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in Figure 17(a), and Figure 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of Figure 104 ( Fig. 10 is a rear view of the swing operation member 20310 as viewed in the direction of arrow CV in a).

104(a) and 104(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position, and in FIG. 104(a), the swing operation member 13310 is A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction with no force applied is illustrated. b) A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise is illustrated.

The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on a cup-shaped rear side frame member 20311 (outside shape similar to the rear side frame member 13311) arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366, and on the rear side frame member 20311. A posture correction device 20312, a front cover 13313, a rear cover 13314, a separation prevention cover 13315, a protection cover 13316, and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

The back-side frame member 20311 has a functional wall portion 20311c as a partition that divides the back opening into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

The functional wall portion 20311c has a concave portion 20311c1 which is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the axial rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correcting device 20312 so as to be able to support the axial rod portion 20312a1; Above the recessed portion 20311c1, the recessed portion 20311c2 to be inserted has a fan-shaped cross section (the width becomes wider as it becomes deeper from the entrance), and from the recessed portion 20311c1 of the recessed portion 20311c2 to be inserted. and a locking projection 20311c3 projecting from the inner side surface on the far side.

The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the body member 20312a so as to pass through an opening 20312a3 of the body member 20312a. Prepare for.

The body member 20312a includes a shaft portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape with the shaft portion 20312a1 arranged at the end, the shaft portion 20312a1 and the flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a clamp recessed at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4 so as to clamp the leaf spring member 20312b. It mainly includes a concave portion 20312a5.

The side surface of the insertion recess 20311c2 farther from the recess 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall in which the recess 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical interval between them is larger than the thickness of the plate spring member 20312b. is also slightly larger.

The plate spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3. The upper part 20312b1 that holds down the shaft part 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end of the upper part 20312b1 (located at the upper end of the opening 20312a3) are bent and the opening 20312a3 faces inward. It is mainly provided with a lower part 20312b2 extending in a manner penetrating through and inserted into the clamping recess 20312a5, and a locking hole 20312b3 drilled in the upper part 20312b1. In this embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction to moderate the bending (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104(a) rotates and rubs counterclockwise).

The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking projection 20311c3 is hooked when the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is subjected to an outward load (toward the right in FIG. 104(a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling out of the insertion recess 20311c2. .

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b can prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the concave portion 20311c1. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction of dropping off, it is necessary to move the plate spring member 20312b together. Since it is in the direction of biting into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the axial rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a from dropping out of the concave portion 20311c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104(b), when the body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the rear side frame member 20311, the plate spring member 20312b is pushed in the direction in which the biasing force of the plate spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the axial rod portion 20312a1 from the concave portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correcting device 2031 during the game, even though the configuration does not use fastening members such as screws.

Here, if an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end of the operation area hole 20311b, The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to the position where the bending is canceled. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed outside the rear side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by visual inspection.

As a method for assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 while the plate spring member 20312b is inserted through the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring member 20312b is not yet inserted into the holding concave portion 20312a5.

Next, the upper part 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b, which is freely movable inside the opening 20312a3, is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104(a) can be formed by pulling the lower part 20312b2 of the plate spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the plate spring member 20312b rotates inside the insertion recess 20311c2 in a direction approaching the locking protrusion 20311c3 with the side surface where the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum. 20312b3 is hooked on locking protrusion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper part 20312b1 from falling out of the insertion recess 20311c2.

In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it is easy to assemble and remove (the lower part 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is not in the assembled state. If the plate spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of 20311, removal becomes difficult.

Therefore, when removing the back side frame member 20311 and removing the posture correcting device 20312 from the inside like maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture can be corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Tampering, such as removing the device 20312, can be made difficult.

Next, referring to FIG. 106, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described. consists of In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 106(a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 106(b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. . 106(a) and 106(b) illustrate a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 106(a), the lever member 13340 On the other hand, FIG. 106B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. be.

As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (diagonally to the upper left in FIG. 106(a)) and disposed inside the pair of friction arms 17362c.

The extension slide portion 21322b2 is provided with a long hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the up-down direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position through which the projecting pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. , the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases as it goes downward, and is formed in such a manner that the projecting pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted therethrough in the state shown in FIG. 106(b).

The oscillating member 21360 includes a body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, a vibration device 366, (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a projecting pin 21362d projecting inwardly from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

In this embodiment, since the protruding pin 21362d is inserted through the long hole 21322b21, the shape of the long hole 21322b21 changes the movement of the swing operation member 13310 relative to the lever member 13340 as the lever member 13340 rotates. be able to. For example, by forming the long hole 21322b21 into a shape equivalent to a circular arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing operation member 13310 moves relative to the lever member 13340. Displacement can be nullified.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated in order to compensate for the displacement of the fitting position between the setting pin 21362d and the long hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in a rotatable direction, i.e., from the state shown in FIG. 106(a) to the state shown in FIG. , FIG. 106(a) clockwise), the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. Thereby, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, a twenty-second embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed by guiding the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove 21322b21. The attitude change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the meshing rotation of the gears. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 107(a) and 107(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a).

FIG. 107(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 107(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. 107(a) and 107(b) illustrate a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 107(a), the lever member 22340 is On the other hand, FIG. 107B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated to the forward roll side, and a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated to the backward roll side with respect to the lever member 22340, respectively. be. Also, in FIGS. 107(a) and 107(b), the illustration of the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 pivotally supported by a lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting a swing operation member 13310 at one end (the left side in FIG. 107(b)), A wall member 22322b having an arcuate wall portion 22322b2 that is constantly meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swinging member 22360 that has a mesh plate portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Prepare the Lord.

The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 pivotally supported by the angle regulating rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and includes an inwardly extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inwardly extending portion thereof. An arcuate wall portion 22322b2 extending from the inner (right in FIG. 107(a)) end of 22322b1 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and having gear teeth meshing with the rotary gear 22347 And prepare.

The oscillating member 22360 is a motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360 in the thirteenth embodiment, which has a toothed plate portion 22362c formed with gear teeth that mesh with the rotary gear 22347. 22362 and configured in a swapped manner.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the lever member 22340 is rotated, the rotary gear 22347 is rotated with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is axially supported as the rotary gear 22347 rotates. It is rotated around the rod 363 . Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

Note that in this embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107(a) to the state shown in FIG. 107(b), during which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees. That is, the gear ratio of the interlocking plate portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the circular arc wall portion 22322b2 is approximately 0.3 (=10/34).

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted and the swinging operation member 310 is configured to be housed in the rear side, so that the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 to store the packing box. When protruding from the box, the front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in the packing box.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, a resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact), Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 abut against each other has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rocking motion of the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted by the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position spaced upward from the eccentric cam member 4333 .

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in one direction. By moving the swing operation member 310 upward and downward, a swing operation can be performed.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can reciprocate up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the tilting operation can be performed. Furthermore, even if the player erroneously lifts the swinging operation member 310 upward during the fanning motion, the lock member 4336 can restrict the swinging of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 Damage can be prevented.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the locking member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to restrict the rocking motion of the lever member 340. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is provided from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is stretched when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated, You may make it enter below the rear-end part of the lever member 340. As shown in FIG.

In this case, it is not necessary to shape the hook-shaped distal end portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that enters the lower side of the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side while the lever member 340 is in the intermediate posture of the swinging angle range has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the swingable range of the lever member 340 is limited above the peeling member 350 whose swinging is restricted. (The lever member 340 cannot be moved enough to apply momentum). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330 .

Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position of the swing angle range. In this case, since the distance between the rear end of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased when the lever member 340 is in a position in which the swing is restricted, the lever member 340 is pulled off the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player, and the player feels the swinging operation member 310 heavy), and the player feels the swinging operation member. It allows time to relax the load on 310 .

On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position of the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that the peeling member 350 exerts a load on the eccentric cam member 333 . may occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, only when the lock member 8336 is arranged closer to the center position than the middle position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not come into contact with the peeling member 350), the lock member 8336 is on the fixed side. may be placed in the

In the ninth embodiment, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length, and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 may each have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic coupling member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic coupling member CS92.

In this case, when the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easier for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is made of hard resin has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hook member 13312c may be made of a shape-memory material that maintains its shape at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the hook member 13312c is disengaged from the support member 13312b by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is made of hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by changing the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed while the rear side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface condition of the extended portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface condition of the extended portion 17322b1 may be formed with a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a smaller friction coefficient than the first region. In this case, the friction arm 17362c gives the first feeling (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who operates the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm 17362c and the extended portion 17322b1 are rubbing each other. It can be changed depending on whether the friction arm 17362c rubs against the second region or when the friction arm 17362c rubs against the second region.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (while the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, by operating the rotating lever 19337b in a direction opposite to the rotating direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing it into contact with the lever member 19340, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be obtained.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<An example of the technical concept of a structure in which the lever member 340 folds when locked>
A gaming machine comprising a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a restricting member that restricts the movement of the moving member, wherein the moving member is an operating member to be operated; and a member to be regulated connected to the operating member and whose movement is restricted by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's manual operation is regulated at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if a player applies an excessive load to the moving member while movement is restricted, the load is applied to the restricting member through the moving member, and the restricting member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member and whose movement can be regulated by the regulating member. When the movement of the member is restricted by the restricting member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so the load is consumed to deform the shape of the moving member. By doing so, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged due to the player applying an excessive load to the moving member.

As for the configuration of the moving member that realizes deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the application of a load, for example, a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is provided in a part of the moving member, or a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. A configuration in which each part is attracted by magnetic force is exemplified.

In a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player may apply an excessive load to the operating member. The higher the pressure, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more overload is applied to the operating member by the player, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member is activated only when a load greater than the attractive force is applied. shape is deformed. As a result, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body when it is normally operated with a load equal to or less than the attraction force, and the moving member can be easily operated.

In the game machine A1, the moving member moves a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the movement of the regulated member is regulated by the regulating member. and a non-transmission state in which at least the operating member is allowed to move relative to the regulated member by applying a load of .

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the moving member can be operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the movement of the regulated member is regulated by the regulating member. By applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the member, it is possible to construct a non-transmission state in which at least the operation member is allowed to move relative to the member to be regulated. In the non-transmission state, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member while ensuring the performance.

In game machines A1 and A2, a supporting member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft provided in the supporting member. , the game machine A3, wherein the movement of the moving member is swinging about the first axis.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and A2, by operating the operating member, it is possible to suppress the application of a large load between the regulating member and the member to be regulated. Damage to the regulating member can be suppressed.

A game machine A4 in the gaming machine A3, further comprising a first biasing member for generating a biasing force for moving the moving member in a swinging direction, the biasing force being applied to the operation member side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the biasing force of the first biasing member is applied to the operating member side and not to the restricted member side, so that the biasing member is applied to the restricting member. It is possible to prevent the urging force from being applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by receiving an excessive biasing force from the first biasing member when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state.

Here, as a case where an excessive biasing force is generated, a spring member is arranged in a manner to connect between the operating member and the member to be regulated, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but the operating member in the non-transmission state. A case is exemplified in which the spring member between the and the member to be regulated is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the member to be regulated increases, and there is a risk that the member to be regulated will exert an excessive force on the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is arranged with the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction, the biasing force of the first biasing member is generated in the direction of tilting the operation member forward, and the fixed state is achieved. The non-transmitting state is constituted by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the moving member of is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

Here, if the biasing direction of the first biasing member is set in the direction in which the moving member rises, when the player applies an overload downward to the operating member, the operating member is separated from the member to be regulated and is regulated. Even if the members can be prevented from being damaged, the operation member rises as soon as the player releases it, so there is a risk that the player will not notice that the overload is being applied and the operation member will be repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the direction of biasing the operating member by the first biasing member is directed in the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, so that the operating member is moved downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly applying an overload to the operating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is arranged with the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the biasing force of the first biasing member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement of the fixed state is achieved. The game machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmitting state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state in which the swinging of the member is regulated by the regulating member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the non-transmission state is configured by directing the operation member in the upward direction and applying a downward load to the operation member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to constitute the non-transmitting state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side due to the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operation members can be stabilized, making it easier for the player to perform the next operation.

A game machine A7 comprising a game machine A6 comprising braking means for reducing a swinging speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmitting state to the fixed state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the swinging speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmitting state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. , it is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper arranged on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and the gear portion arranged on the operation member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, since the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance, the greater the swing speed of the operation member, the greater the resistance applied to the operation member. . Therefore, resistance is suppressed when the swing speed is low (return speed of the operation member is low). The resistance can be large.

As a result, the biasing force of the first biasing member can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the first biasing member can be designed freely. degree can be improved.

A gaming machine A9 in the gaming machine A8, characterized in that the gear damper is arranged in such a manner as to generate viscous resistance in the relative movement of the operating member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the member to be regulated are fixed and rocked together, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the member to be regulated does not change, so the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmitting state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is applied to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operating member only when the player applies such a load to the operating member that the regulated member and the operating member are in a non-transmissive state. As a result, it is possible to change the sense of operation when the player operates the operation member, and encourage the player to use the operation member appropriately.

For example, if the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation member, which causes stress. If the operating member and the member to be regulated are returned to a fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, making it easier for the player to operate.

Therefore, the more the player tries to avoid stress, the more he avoids applying an overload to the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the moving member from being destroyed.

In any one of game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member, the moving member receiving a load and A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when the fixed state is changed to the non-transmission state.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. , the transmission member can be prevented from being damaged, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member includes the position on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the moving member receives the load, and the position in which the moving member moves in the direction in which the moving member receives the load. In some cases, a position in the direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state and driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, even if a driving force is generated from the driving device when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, the driving force generated at that time is not affected by the operating member. is used for swinging of the regulated member and not used for swinging of the member to be regulated, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position in comparison with the case in which the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. projecting outward, and when the moving member is placed at the second position, the movement of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, and the operating member and the restricted member are attracted by an electromagnet. A game machine A12 characterized in that the fixed state is constituted by the game machine A12.

Here, since the width of the outward protrusion of the operating member is smaller when the swinging of the operating member is restricted at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing a game machine, the operating member at the first position The size of the box can be reduced by selecting the fixed state as a reference.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swinging of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the game machine cannot be placed in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed at the first position in the factory inspection line, etc., the operation member may be mistakenly placed at the second position and the swinging may be fixed. There is a problem that the operation member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement of the moving member is restricted at the second position where the operation member projects, the operation member and the restricted member Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member can be released by turning off the power. As a result, the operation member can be easily arranged at the first position, and the game machine can be easily accommodated in the packing box or inspected on the improved inspection line.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. and a transmission member that transmits to the transmission member, wherein the movement member is moved in a direction away from the transmission member by operating the movement member in one direction. Machine B1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation is driven by the meshing of gears (for example, JP-A-2014-2014). -144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear increases, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member decreases, and the moving member is displaced by driving. There is a problem that there is a risk of imposing a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member to one side, the moving member moves away from the transmitting member, so that the moving member applies a load to the driving device and the transmitting member. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the moving member from imposing a load on the player due to the drive. Examples of transmission members include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

A game machine B2 in the game machine B1, characterized in that said transmission member comprises a member eccentrically supported on a first shaft and rotated about said first shaft.

Here, since the moving member and the transmission member are separated by operating the moving member in one direction, the moving member collides with the transmitting member when the moving member is operated in the other direction. In many cases, the larger the movement width of the moving member, the longer the arm length of the transmission member. In this case, the collision may damage the transmission member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, it is possible to drive the moving member at a portion where the distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is long. While ensuring the amount of movement, when colliding with the moving member, the portion with a short distance from the first axis to the outer shape is oriented toward the moving member, so that the moving member and the transmission member collide from the first axis. It is possible to shorten the length of the arm of the transmission member in the portion where the transmission is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a first biasing member that generates a biasing force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, the specific direction being a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member approach each other. Gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the biasing force of the first biasing member presses the moving member against the transmission member. The member can be caused to reciprocate. As a result, the player's attention can be easily focused on the moving member.

In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second shaft that is different from the first shaft and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A game machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft and below the moving member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the second shaft extends in the left-right direction, and in a state in which the lever can swing in the forward tilting direction, the transmission member is positioned below the moving member. Since it is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operation member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in the game machine B4, an effect member for effecting an effect for the player is arranged in the operation member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the operation member is provided with an effect member for performing an effect for the player, so that the operation member can attract the player's attention.

Examples of the effect device for effecting the effect for the player include a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on a base, a vibrating device for generating vibration, and the like.

In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that vibrates, and the load applied to the operating member by vibrating the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by:

Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that at least vibrates, and the load applied to the operation member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is applied to the moving member. is directed away from the transmission member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member due to the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

In the game machine B6, the operating member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow interior, the vibrating device is disposed substantially in the center of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrating by the vibrating device is provided outside the operating member. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the operating member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibrating device is disposed substantially in the center of the operating member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. In addition, since the vibrating part that vibrates by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, the fingers of the player operating the operating member can directly vibrate. I can tell you. Therefore, the performance effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member capable of performing a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is aligned with the first axis across the second axis. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being arranged on the opposite side.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is set in the second direction. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first shaft across the shaft, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load is applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. can be reduced.

A game machine B9 characterized in that a game machine B8 comprises a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed, and a pushing disabled state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the push-in enabled state in which the push-in member can be pushed in, and the push-in impossible state in which the push-in member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed in, are formed. The game machine side can switch the influence of the operation performed by the player on the moving member.

For example, when the player intermittently and repeatedly pushes (hit) the pushing member, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the reaction causes the moving member to receive a load in the direction of approaching the transmission member. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in disabled state is established, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the moving member also moves away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the push-in member, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from colliding with the moving member due to the upward return of the operating member due to the biasing force.

As a method of constructing the push-incapable state, there is a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw, or a method of extending the push-in member to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that performs linear reciprocating motion. A method (continuous application of load in one direction) and the like are exemplified. According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device produces both actions of vibrating the pushing member and making the pushing member unable to be pushed. can be made

In any one of game machines B4 to B9, the first shaft and the second shaft are arranged in parallel, and the direction of rotation of the transmission member is the side on which the second shaft is interposed and separated from the first shaft. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the direction faces the moving member.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves in opposition to the moving member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction approaching the moving member, it is possible to reduce the possibility of damage to the transmission member.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member includes a rotary gear that is supported by a first shaft and receives driving force from the driving device, and a rotary gear that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft and is supported by the moving member. and an eccentric cam abutted against a member, comprising a fixed state in which the rotating gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmitting state in which the rotating gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam. A gaming machine B11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the rotation of the transmission member can swing the moving member, and the eccentric cam can move from the moving member to the threshold value or more. When a load is applied, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be relieved by putting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmitting state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The non-transmitting state between the eccentric cam and the rotating gear may be, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are connected in the circumferential direction. A case where they are fitted by friction is exemplified.

<An example of a technical concept in which a lock member for fixing a moving member is synchronized with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates driving force for driving the moving member, and a first shaft that is eccentrically supported on the first shaft. A gaming machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member; A standby state in which regulation is possible and a release state in which regulation of swinging of the moving member is released can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulation member are synchronously operated by the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is moved between a first position and a second position by a player's operation is swung by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device. By receiving a biasing force that moves the moving member in a direction approaching the eccentric cam-like transmission member, the moving member is restricted from swinging during the swinging motion of the moving member, and at a predetermined timing, the swinging motion of the moving member is restricted. There is a gaming machine that has a restricting member for releasing (for example, see JP-A-2013-244108). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the short diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side contacting the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swinging movement of the moving member. Although it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the attitude of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed, and the eccentric There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the major diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member for regulating the rocking movement of the moving member operate synchronously by the driving force of the driving device. It is possible to mechanically determine the posture of the transmission member when is released. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member directed toward the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the regulating member operates synchronously with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the regulation of swinging of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulating member The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the members are in the standby state, and when the moving member moves to a predetermined position, swinging of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member after the restricting member releases the restriction on the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to movement of the restricting member together with the rotating transmission member.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the movement of the moving member can be restricted by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous driving with the member (releasing the rocking restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

In the gaming machine C2, when the regulating member is in the standby state, the regulating member is moved such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, thereby regulating the swinging of the moving member, The moving member can perform a first movement that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second movement that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a recessed portion that is recessed away from the swinging trajectory of the outer shape portion of the moving member when executing the first action.

When the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated before the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation not intended to be restricted in the swinging direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force is required for the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member executes the first action, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a first biasing device is provided for generating a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation member is released from swinging the movable member and the movable member is moved toward the transmission member by an urging force, the inner cam portion of the transmission member and a first side surface, which is a side surface that contacts the moving member, is configured to contact a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the moving member is configured to contact the cylindrical portion. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the first side surface starts to abut against the moving member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member with the urging force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface of the transmission member that comes into contact with the moving member, is in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first shaft. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts contacting the cylindrical portion, it is possible to ensure the maximum swing displacement of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to establish a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is ensured immediately after the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released.

In the game machine C4, a game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swing motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotation direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member will collide with the moving member, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not collide with the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to know when the moving member and the transmission member come into contact with each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, since the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, thereby enhancing the performance effect. be able to.

With synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, thereby improving the swinging speed of the moving member. can be made

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a first biasing device is provided for generating a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmitting member abuts against the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the game machine C6 includes a first biasing device that generates a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction toward the transmission member, and the transmission member is It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates about a first shaft, and when the regulation of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmission member contacts the moving member and follows the rotation of the transmission member to move. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on swinging of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<An example of the technical concept in which the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player; and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined with respect to each other.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibrating device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device disposed on the moving member are inclined, the vibration generated by the vibrating device is transmitted to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that vibrates in a linear direction, a vibrator that vibrates by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a driving device for generating a driving force for swinging the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a device for generating vibration, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the vibration of the vibrating device transmits the moving member. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device comprises a device that generates vibration in a linear direction, the vibration device is supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibration device is controlled. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a central axis is arranged in a manner passing through the second axis, and a cushioning member for absorbing vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is supported by the second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in a linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and the buffer member is arranged on the second shaft, the impact of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member. As a result, vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and is constructed in such a manner that the rotation resistance of the second shaft increases by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing operation of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the vibration device and ensure a large vibration component, especially when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the player can switch between a state in which the vibrating device is easily rotated on the second shaft and a state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component.

A game machine D5 characterized in that, in the game machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is rigidly connected to the pushing member, so that the player can feel the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and oscillated about the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. By suppressing , the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to change the behavior of the vibration device according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged in a manner passing through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a pivot, by aligning the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device with the pivot position, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. As a result, loosening of fastening screws and deterioration of members occur at an early stage, resulting in a problem that the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device, vibration is caused by rotating the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the vibration device). In addition, the production effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

A game machine D7, wherein the game machine D6 comprises a detection device for detecting vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by a player.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the operation member held by the player is provided with the vibrating device, and the detecting device for detecting the vibration of the vibrating device is provided. By holding the operation member while the user is in the room, the vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. As a result, it is possible to detect whether the player is gripping the operating member (whether the player is in the stage of preparation for operating the moving member).

<An example of the technical concept of assisting the input timing of the moving member that performs the fanning>
A gaming machine E1 is characterized by comprising an input device for input operation by a player, the input device being driven in a direction toward and away from the player and comprising an input unit for performing an input operation.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing of operating an input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting to adjust the strength of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player. By operating the input unit in such a manner as to push it back when it comes into contact with the , the game machine can determine the timing of the operation of the input unit.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button, an operation of pulling a moving member, and the like.

In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device matches the direction of operating the input unit, and the vibrating device vibrates the input unit. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input section is inoperable when the vibration device is pressed against the input section, and the input section is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input section.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the vibration device is pressed against the input section, the input section is disabled, and when the vibration device is retracted from the input section, the input section is disabled. Since the portion can be operated, the vibrating device can have both a performance effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of determining the timing of operating the input portion.

In the game machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device that applies a reaction force to the player when the player operates the input unit is the same as the vibration when the transmission device transmits the vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side is smaller than that of the second urging device.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device, so the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force while securing a high speed for returning to the position where it is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of vibration passively felt by the player.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member of a size that can be held by the player, and when the player holds the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the player's palm. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device having the input unit is formed as a member of a size that can be held by the player, and when the player holds the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by gripping the input device further, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the grip of the input device can be eliminated.

Also, since the input section can be hidden by the palm, only the player holding the input section can grasp the vibration of the input section. As a result, it is possible to announce a big win or the like in a manner unnoticed by other players.

A gaming machine E5 in the gaming machine E4, characterized in that a locking portion for locking a finger is provided on the side opposite to the input portion of the input device.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced by receiving the vibration of the input part side with the palm and hooking the finger on the locking part. You can lock it inside your palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large vibration that the player feels.

<An example of the technical concept in which the spherical portion turns toward the player at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation portion operated by a player and configured to be movable; and a connection member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable. , when the attitude of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation part can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the attitude is reduced. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising correction means for changing the posture of an operation member in a direction.

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes an operation member having an operation portion such as a push button, and in which the posture of the operation member with respect to the player changes between a first state and a second state as the operation member moves. See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, for example, if the player takes a posture that allows easy operation in the first state, it may become difficult to operate in the second state. There is a problem that the change may cause the player to feel stress and dissatisfaction.

For example, if the operating member is placed at a distance from the front of the player and the operating part requires a push-down motion, even if the operating part can be operated easily, the operating member can extend in the left-right direction. By moving on an arc trajectory centered on the player, when the operation part changes to a mode requiring a pushing action from the front side, the space for arranging the arm that pushes the operation part becomes narrower, and the game It becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may give up operating the operation unit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the attitude of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation member by moving the connection member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. Since the correcting means is provided for changing the attitude of the operation member in the direction of reducing the amount of change when the operation is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the operation of the operation member. Therefore, by being configured so that it is easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is easy for the player to operate in the second state.

The correcting means is composed of, for example, a wall member and an abutment member disposed on the operation member in a manner capable of abutting against the wall member, and the correction is generated when the abutment member abuts against the wall member. A device that changes the posture of an operating member by a reaction force, a device composed of a gear group that meshes with gear teeth arranged on the operating member and applies a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. are exemplified.

Further, examples of the mode of movement of the connection member include rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, sliding movement in a linear direction, and the like.

In the game machine F1, a driving device for driving the connection member is provided. and a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained, and the load generated on the operation member from the correction means during the change state is oriented in the direction of braking the connection member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, since the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connection member, the connection member can be driven more easily than when the connection member always changes its posture. The driving force required for braking the connecting member can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correcting means during the change state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device is required to brake the connecting member. The force that needs to be generated can be assisted by the correction means and the load applied to the drive can be reduced.

For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and constitute the change state when the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the movement range, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the movement range It is possible to reduce the moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member due to the load, and to suppress the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to near the upper end of the movement range. , the driving force required to drive the connection member can be suppressed.

In the game machine F2, a member to be abutted by the correcting means is provided, and the attitude of the operating member is changed by the correcting means abutting on the member to be abutted when the operating member is moved. Characterized game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the attitude of the operating member changes due to the contact between the correcting means and the member to be contacted. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is disposed on the connecting member, and the attitude of the operating member can be maintained by the connecting member until the correcting means reaches the position where the abutted member is arranged. , it is possible to indicate the timing for the player to operate the operation unit.

In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is brought into the changed state, the operating member is changed to the above-described state by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated by the correcting means to the operating member. The game machine F4 is characterized in that the correction means is configured so as to be able to change its posture in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture is changed in the change state, the direction of displacement and the direction of force, which are directions opposite to the direction of the change in posture, face each other. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction that may cause the load to become excessive, the correcting means is configured to change the posture of the operating member in a predetermined direction, thereby suppressing destruction of the correcting means. can do.

In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the correction means, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the change in the posture of the operation member. can be generated, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operation member, the amount of movement of the operation member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operation member from the correction means as the amount of movement of the operation member increases. can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means comprises a contacted member that contacts, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the game machine main body, and the correcting means contacts the contacted member. A game machine F6 characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when the member comes into contact with the member is a direction having a directional component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means contacts the contacted member in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the lever member in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correcting means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member can be stabilized when the operating member contacts the abutted member and changes its posture, and the operability can be improved.

In the game machine F6, the abutted member protrudes so as to come into contact with the lever member by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more from the correcting means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the abutted member through the correcting means by the player's operation or the like, the abutted member is moved to the lever member. By projecting to the abutment position, the lever member is braked and the moving speed of the lever member can be suppressed. Movement resistance can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of a technical concept that enables switching between whether or not the spherical portion turns around at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation portion operated by a player, a connection member that connects the operation member to a gaming machine main body in such a manner that the operation member can move within a predetermined width, and a drive device that drives at least the connection member, and are connected to each other. In a game machine in which an operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture while the member is arranged at a predetermined position, a driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. a first operating state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture in a state in which a transmission member is provided and the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position; a second operating state in which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via a transmission member, and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture; The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state.

A gaming machine is known that includes an operation member and a connection member, and drives the operation member relative to the connection member by a driving device that drives the connection member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are situations where operability is emphasized and situations where performance effects are emphasized, there is only one type of movement of the operating member relative to the movement of the connecting member, so whether operability is emphasized. There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one of the two methods, which emphasized the production effect, and sacrificed the other.

For example, when a push button to be operated by a player is arranged on the operation member, the player can easily press the push button if the position of the push button as seen from the player is fixed, while the operation member Since the movement of the device itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to use the movement of the operating member to perform a large effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the first operation state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture while the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, The second operating state in which the driving force of the drive device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture can be switched while the movement width of the operating member remains unchanged. , it is possible to achieve both operability and performance effects.

For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the orientation of the operation member is changed to the second orientation, and the push button is pushed in an orientation that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, when the performance is not required to be operated by the player, the posture of the operating member can be changed to the performance disregarding the operability by keeping the posture of the operating member as it is in the first posture, and the operating member can be greatly moved. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in operability and an improvement in performance.

In addition, since the movement width of the operation member is fixed between the first operation state and the second operation state, the player can determine which operation state the operation member is in until the posture of the operation member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether the player is playing, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, the operation member is kept in the first operation state until the timing at which the player operates the operation unit, and the operation member continues to reciprocate in a predetermined width, and at the predetermined timing, the operation member is switched to the second operation state and the attitude of the operation member is changed. , the player can be notified of the timing to press the operation part, and the operation member itself is made easy to press, so that the game is easy to understand (easy to understand the timing to press the push button) and comfortable (push button to make it easier to press).

The gaming machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force from the driving device to the connection member, and the eccentric cam member A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to either the transmission member or the connection member, and is provided with switching means capable of switching between the transmission member and the connection member.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member are driven at the same time, the driving force generated from the driving device can be suppressed.

As a mode for switching between transmission of the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member and transmission to the operating member, a group of gears that are connected to the operating member and the connecting member from the driving device by meshing are provided, and depending on the situation, A mode in which meshing gears can be switched, and an eccentric cam member is configured to contact either the connecting member or the transmission member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. A mode in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member contacts the transmission member while being rotated forward, the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that when the driving force is not transmitted to the operation member when the transmission member abuts on the transmission member in the state of being held.

Here, for example, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member when the eccentric cam member and the connection member are separated from each other, vibration during operation and operation of the operation member by the player may occur. For this reason, it becomes necessary to stop the driving device in order to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. and complicates the control of the drive.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member. Even if the eccentric cam member is separated from the cam member in the middle of the operation, as long as the eccentric cam member continues to rotate in a certain direction, the target of the driving force transmission will not be switched, so there is a risk that the driving force will be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. does not occur, and the control of the driving device can be made loose (immediate stopping of the driving device is unnecessary).

Moreover, since a detection sensor for detecting that the connection member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G3, the eccentric cam member has a first projecting portion projecting along the rotation shaft on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a state capable of coming into contact with the first projecting portion. A second projecting portion is provided in a projecting manner, and has a region in which the second projecting portion moves closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member rotates. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second projecting portion is arranged closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, as the eccentric cam member rotates, the second projecting portion has a region that moves closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member. , the second projecting portion is arranged closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion. It can be performed by passing the second projecting portion between the rotating shaft of.

Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the transmission member is restored after the second projecting portion moves to the outside of the trajectory of the outer diameter portion of the first projecting portion of the eccentric cam member, the first projecting portion is the first projecting portion. It is possible to suppress the rotation angle of the transmission member from the time it comes into contact with the 2 projecting portions to the time it separates, and it is possible to suppress the angular range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases.

In the gaming machine G4, the first projecting portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first projecting portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. The pushing wall surface that abuts against the second convex portion in a state in which the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation is inclined so as to come closer to the predetermined straight line as it goes away in the axial radial direction. Characteristic game machine G5.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member in which the driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member is forward rotation, contact with the transmission member. Since the pressing wall surface in contact with the straight line is configured to be inclined in such a manner that the further away it is in the axial radial direction, the closer it approaches to the predetermined straight line. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, since the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted via the transmission member per predetermined time can be reduced, a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operating member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

In any one of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member is provided for fixing the attitude of the connection member at a predetermined position, and when the lock member releases the fixation of the attitude of the connection member, the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. The game machine G6 is characterized in that, on the other hand, when the eccentric cam member rotates forward, the fixing of the attitude of the connecting member by the locking member is maintained.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the release of the fixing of the connection member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (positive rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in the . Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, both the maintenance of the attitude of the connecting member by the locking member and the change of the attitude of the operation member can be achieved, so that the control of the driving device can be moderated. can.

<An example of a technical concept in which the suppressing member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force that pushes out the second moving member>
and a first moving member configured to be movable; 2 a moving member, an elastic member disposed on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member and having one end connected to the second moving member and having spring elasticity; a suppressing member disposed at the other end of the elastic member and suppressing separation of the second moving member from the first moving member by being pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member; , wherein a portion of the second moving member projecting from the first moving member moves to increase a force for pressing the suppressing member against the first moving member.

A game machine is known that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that extends outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, the second moving member may collide with another member during movement of the first moving member and may be damaged, requiring replacement. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated when colliding with another member.

In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force compared to fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time and effort to screw in the screws during assembly and to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, resulting in a longer working time.

That is, it is necessary to firmly fix the second moving member to the first moving member, and to shorten the work time for assembling the second moving member to the first moving member and removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There is a problem that it is difficult to achieve both.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion projecting from the first moving member operates in the direction against the elastic force of the elastic member, and the force with which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the suppressing member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by the elastic force, the replacement time can be shortened, and even when the second moving member comes into contact with another member, the second moving member is kept in the first movement. Detachment from the member can be prevented.

In the game machine H1, a hook member is provided to hold the suppressing member immovably on the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being arranged at a part of a position movable in a direction pressed against the first moving member.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the position where the restraint member is movable in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member. Before being attached to the moving member, the space in which the hook member is attached becomes an empty space, so it becomes easy to dispose the suppressing member, and after attachment of the hook member, the suppressing member moves from the first moving member to the elastic member. Separation in the direction perpendicular to the elastic force can be suppressed.

In addition, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the position where the restraining member can move in the direction in which it is pressed against the first moving member, the force that holds the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member, and accordingly the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member.

In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraint member can be prevented from being illegally removed by the player, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member in the case of detachment or forgetting to assemble, and maintenance time can be shortened.

Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, the hook member can be configured to drop outside the first moving member when the hook member is detached from the first moving member, thereby preventing the hook member from dropping. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the need for maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

Furthermore, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be shrunk excessively by the dimension of the locking projection for locking the hook member so that it cannot be pulled out from the first moving member. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged on the outside of the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when the hook member is assembled can be reduced. can be suppressed. As a result, the elastic force of the elastic member can be kept large, and the holding strength of the second moving member and the suppressing member to the first moving member can be kept large (while using a stiffer elastic member), and the attachment of the hook member can be facilitated. can be made easier.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the hook member can be detached from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, by displacing the suppressing member disposed inside the first moving member in the direction opposite to the direction in which the elastic force is pressed, the hook member moves to the first position. Since it is detachable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally detaching the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress illegal removal of the hook member.

A game machine according to any one of the game machines H2 to H4, wherein the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by the suppression member entering a position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, the space where the hook member was arranged becomes vacant due to the breakage of the hook member, etc. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the buffering action against the load applied to the second moving member after the hook member is broken and the space in which it was arranged becomes empty. , the breakage of the second moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a configuration of the hook member, for example, a configuration that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while it is broken, so that it is possible to easily confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

In any one of game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulled-out state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member, and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized by being able to form a.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form the pulled state and the locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. , and a state in which fraud prevention performance can be improved by preventing the second moving member from being easily removed.

In the gaming machine H6, the pulled state can be formed by the suppression member entering a space in which the hook member is arranged in a state in which the suppression member is held by the hook member. Gaming machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by inserting the restraining member into the empty space in the state where the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state in which the members are arranged at the correct positions, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and illegal removal of the second moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from its normal position, a pulled state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, thereby improving maintenance performance. can be made

<An example of the technical concept of changing the rotational resistance of the spherical portion to the connection member>
An operation member configured to be operable by a player and a connection member movably supporting the operation member are provided, and the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction is reduced with respect to the connection member. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making variable.

A gaming machine is known that includes a connection member and an operation member configured to be movable with respect to the connection member (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, there is no change in the feeling of operation (for example, the weight felt by the player), and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

For example, even if the operating member is rotatably supported by the connecting member, and the rotation resistance is changed between forward rotation of the operating member and reverse rotation of the operating member, the player can rotate the operating member. Since the relationship between the direction of operation and the rotational resistance is always constant, the player is less likely to notice (discover) the action of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since it is provided with variable means for varying the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation when the operation member is operated in the same direction The sense of operation of the member can be varied, and the interest of the player who operates the operation member can be enhanced.

In addition, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of the variable means includes a mode of adjusting the position of the connecting member, a mode of adjusting the amount of displacement of the operating member, a mode of adjusting the amount of displacement of the operating member, and (for example, a member for driving the connecting member) is used for adjustment.

For example, according to a mode in which adjustment is performed by members other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be understood only after touching the operating member. attention to the operation member can be increased.

Further, when the connection member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, by making it possible to switch between strength and weakness of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member with respect to the movement resistance of the connection member with respect to the game machine main body, While asking the player to only operate the operating member, depending on the situation, it is easier to move the operating member relative to the connecting member than to move the connecting member relative to the main body of the game machine. It is possible to switch between situations in which it is easier to move the connection member with respect to the game machine main body than to move the (difference from hardening the push button).

The game machine I2 is characterized in that the connection member is configured to be movable in the game machine I1, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connection member.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member to the connection member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connection member, so the speed at which the connection member or the operation member is operated can be adjusted. It is possible to change the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member regardless of.

In addition, as a mode for adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connection member, there is a mode for changing the movement resistance corresponding to the movement amount of the connection member, and a movement resistance when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. are exemplified.

The game machine I2 includes a biasing member that generates an elastic force that biases the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, and a wall member that is disposed so as to be able to contact the operation member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member receives a load from the wall member in a first direction opposite to the biasing direction of the biasing member, A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is constructed in a manner in which the operating member is moved.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the operation member abuts against the wall member due to the connection member being arranged at the predetermined position, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member stationary against the connecting member is improved compared to the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at the predetermined position.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the gaming machine I2 comprises a friction member which extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member while the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2, the operation member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. dynamic friction can be applied to the operation member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

As for the arrangement position of the friction member, a mode in which the friction member is disposed in the connection member and a mode in which the friction member is disposed in the main body case that supports the connection member are exemplified.

The gaming machine I4 comprises a main body case for supporting the connection member inside a box, and a cover member disposed outside the main body case, wherein the friction member extends from the cover member toward the connection member. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part provided.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged in the connection member. .

In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operation member in a rubbing state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction compared to the low friction portion, and they are A gaming machine I6 characterized by being divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

According to the game machine I6, it is possible to change the movement resistance of the operating member to the connection member depending on whether the operating member receives dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or receives dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two levels.

In the gaming machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member that configures the position of the center of gravity, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being filled.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member. The load applied to the operation member can be reduced compared to the case where the movement resistance of the operation member is increased by applying a load in the direction opposite to the direction.

In addition, since it is possible to improve the rotational resistance in the direction of rotation for lifting the weight member when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, by moving the weight member and reversing the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis. , the direction in which the rotation resistance increases can be reversed. Therefore, it is possible to change the feeling of operation given to the player.

As a mode for moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to a change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship of both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. A mode in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates driving force, a transmission device configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connection member, and a resistance change member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operation member by displacement. , wherein the resistance change member is displaced by the driving force of the driving device.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member is adjusted by displacing the resistance change member with the driving force of the driving device that drives the connection member, so additional driving is provided. Without any device, the movement resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member.

Therefore, the state of movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only after the player touches it, and the value of touching the operating member for the player can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operation member is changed when an advantageous state is reached, it is possible to notify that the player is in an advantageous state in a manner that only the player who operates the operation member can understand. .

In any of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine J1 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by: Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a insertion hole (locking portion)
313d second sensor member (detection device)
317, 13317 lens member (part of input device, input unit, pushing member, operation unit)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 inner case member (part of support member, body case)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first shaft, second shaft)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 first driving device (driving device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 lock member (restriction member, lock member)
338 gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of member to be regulated)
363 pivot rod (second shaft)
364 buffer member 366 vibrating device (part of production member, vibrating device)
366b pressing member (vibrating portion)
2333a body member (rotating gear)
2333b cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 curved wall portion (recessed portion)
13312, 15312, 20312 posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a contact member (second moving member)
13312b support member 13312c hook member (lock member)
13322 right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (abutted member)
14333c2 projecting portion (first projecting portion)
14337 posture switching device (switching means)
14337a body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 projecting portion (second projecting portion)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extended portion (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
CS1 Oscillating coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 pushing coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 torsion spring (first biasing member, biasing member)
SP13 coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine including an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by being manually operated by a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating members.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine with good operability of operating members.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises an operation member having an operation portion operated by a player and configured to be movable, and a movable operating member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is movable. movement of the connecting member, the posture of the operating member viewed from the player who operates the operating section is changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state. Correction means is provided for changing the attitude of the operating member in a direction that reduces the amount of change in the attitude when it can be formed.

According to the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation member.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member; Fig. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a main body member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member and a swing member of the lever member; It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member taken along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). is. (a) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member taken along line XVc-XVc of FIG. 15(a). is. (a) is a front view of a lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb in FIG. It is a top view of a lever member in direction view. (a) is a front view of the operation device, and (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17(a); c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a); Fig. 18(b) is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of Fig. 18(a); 17B is a cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member taken along line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. FIG. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). (a) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of a main body member, (d) is a side view of a main body member in the arrow XXXd direction view of FIG.30(c). (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in direction XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in direction XXXIIb of FIG. 32(a), and (c) is FIG. 32(a). 10 is a side view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in direction XXXIIc of FIG. (a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of XXXIIIb in FIG. 33(a). (a) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a locking member, and an unlocking cam member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a locking member, and an unlocking cam member. 4(a) to 4(c) are front views of the body member of the oscillating member illustrated as viewed in the axial direction of the pivot rod. FIG. (a) is a top view of a motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate as viewed in the direction of XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37(b). FIG. 10 is a side view of the motor fixing plate showing a state in which the U-shaped member has been slid from the state; 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the third embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device in a 4th embodiment. 44(a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as seen in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are side views of a locking member. Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member; 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); (a) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side views of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member as viewed in the direction of LIIIb in FIG. 53(a). It is a diagram. 7(a) and 7(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operation device taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a fifth embodiment; (a) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56(a), and (c) is a LVIc of FIG. It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in direction view. 57(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIb in FIG. 57(a), and (c) is FIG. 57(a). is a side view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the direction of LVIIc. (a) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of LVIII in FIG. 58(a). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lock member; (a) and (b) show the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member showing the operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in chronological order. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the seventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the eighth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the tenth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 17(b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Fig. 17(a); 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member; Fig. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a main body member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member and a swing member of the lever member; It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (a) is a bottom view of the front cover and rear cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, rear cover and separation prevention cover, and (c) is line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83(b). 2 is a cross-sectional view of the front cover, the rear cover, the separation prevention cover, and the protection cover in FIG. (a) is a perspective view of a back side frame member, and (b) is a back side frame member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84(c) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc of FIG. 84(b). (a) is a front perspective view of a hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 85(d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd of FIG. 85(b). FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the supporting member, (b) is a top view of the supporting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a), and (c) is LXXXVIc in FIG. 86(b). -LXXXVIc is a cross-sectional view of the support member. (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a), and (c) is a back side FIG. 87D is a partial top view of the frame member and the posture correction device, FIG. 87D is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87(d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of 87(d). (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88(a). 88(c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId in FIG. 88(c). (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. 88(e). is. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 91(a) is a front view of a lock member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91(a). FIG. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); (a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); (a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. (a) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross section of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 98(d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device taken along the line LXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98(c). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correcting device along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 99(a). It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction apparatus. (a) to (d) are side views of the operation device according to the sixteenth embodiment. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the seventeenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); 17(a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the eighteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a); FIG. 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the nineteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twentieth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 104(a) is a rear view of the swing operation member as viewed in the direction of arrow CV in Fig. 104(a); 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twenty-first embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 17(a) and 17(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

A front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17.例文帳に追加The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 are arranged to be operated by the player to hit the ball to the front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole. A pair of out ports are provided on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335 a and 337 a and vibration device 366 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped by the player. The unit 15 can be moved in a region defined by a housing recess 15a vertically recessed in the center of the unit 15 in the left-right direction.

Between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a, there is a gap large enough for at least a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grasp the swing operation member 310 from above. When the swing operation member 310 is grasped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swing operation member 310. The hand is prevented from slipping down from the swing operation member 310 even if the force is relaxed and gravity is used. Therefore, the burden of keeping the player's hand on the swing operation device 310 can be reduced.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a). 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. ), and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown in phantom lines.

The housing recess 15 a of the lower tray unit 15 and the housing recess 17 a of the upper tray 17 are sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, when the player holds the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent fingers from being caught between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310 . In this state, the lens member 317, which also serves as a push button portion, is arranged to face the palm, so that the player can push the vibration member 310 by gripping the swing operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to press the lens member 317 while holding the swinging operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger while holding the swinging operation member 310 or changing the grip of the swinging operation member 310 . can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

A lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player holds the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, by vibrating the lens member 317 after detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.). It is possible to prevent situations in which people do not notice. Therefore, the presentation effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pressing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and it is possible to concentrate too much on the timing of the input operation and not play the game. You can solve the problem of not being able to concentrate.

When the player holds the swing operation member 310, the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand. It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to grasp whether the swing operation member 310 is moving or not. Therefore, only the player holding the swing operation member 310 can be notified of the big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 differ between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when the player operates the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction or in the front-rear direction, so that the player can feel the actual operation.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310 , the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312 and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311 . Since the back side frame member 311 is bent back in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of curvature radius on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. 7(b). It is possible to prevent the fingertips from coming off the back side frame member 311 even in a posture where the wrist is stiff, such as when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In addition, since the fingertips are caught on the rear-side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and a large amount of vibration felt by the player can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swinging operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, thereby naturally turning the wrist. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swinging operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22(b)) can be performed by extending the wrist in a state in which the wrist is released from the turning. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the pivotal support rod 363 that is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, the length from the upper end of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the pivot rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. As a result, when the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated about the shaft support rod 363, the swing operation member 310 can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, a large force may be required to rotate the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363 by placing a hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 (misoperation). Therefore, the burden on the player when holding the upper portion of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can put his/her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310, thereby An erroneous operation to rotate the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is arranged such that the swing operation member 310 protrudes from the rectangular outer case member 320 toward the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 arranged inside the outer case member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 has a rear side formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11). A front cover 321 attached in such a manner as to hide an edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a projecting portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, the front cover 321 and the upper cover. A left cover member 323 and a right cover member 324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in such a manner that the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right direction of the inner case member 322 are fitted into the inner case member 330. and a sensor board 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a arranged to protrude inside.

By fastening and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 while fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, it is possible to prevent the fastening screws from being visible in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent tampering by disassembling the operation device 300 .

The sensor member 325a includes a first photocoupler type sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a second photocoupler type sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and the second sensor member 325a2. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors for detecting the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor for detecting the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor includes a light-projecting part that projects light and a light-receiving part that receives the light from the light-projecting part, and has a gap (slit) into which a part to be detected can be inserted. It means sensors arranged in a substantially U-shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 10, illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 which are assembled into a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 331. an eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by a shaft 331d2, a phase detecting member 334 whose relative phase with the eccentric cam member 333 remains unchanged and which is pivotally supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333; A first driving device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside and generates driving force for rotating the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. , a second driving device 337 which is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside and generates driving force for rotating the lock member 336; , is mainly provided.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member with an opening formed on the right side. A rectangular plate-like upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side in front view (rear side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and an upper side wall portion 331b extending rightward from the edge of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-like connection side wall portion 331c that abuts the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of cylindrical rod-like members projecting rightward from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e drilled in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-like member 331d projecting leftward from the upper side wall portion 331b. and a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member with an opening formed on the left side, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (the right side portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side wall portion 332a. A plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right in front view (the front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that extends leftward from the edge of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b is the front side. A plate-like connection side wall portion 332c that abuts against the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion, and a pair of circular shapes are perforated in the lower side wall portion 332a so as to form a gear portion of the second driving device 337. A drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted through, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a rightward extension of the upper side wall portion 332b. A cylindrical shaft support portion 332g with a bottom that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the protruding rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular projection projecting annularly on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. 332i and .

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed such that the front upper portion thereof has a 1/4 circular shape centered on the pivot portions 331g and 332g when viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17(b)), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c Notches 331c1 and 332c1 cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper front side.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (displacement in the extending direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by using the quarter circle shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed from four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-like member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 protruding from the bottom and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is rotatably supported, and both ends of the lever support shaft 331d1 are supported by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are aligned in phase.

Both the lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member supported by the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336 c of the member 336 .

The insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes in this embodiment. That is, an elongated guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, and a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2 which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a driving member insertion hole 331e3 which is arranged below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is drilled in a manner in which a pair of circular shapes are combined. Prepare the Lord.

The guide support hole 331e1 is inserted with the angle regulating rod member 346, guides the swinging motion of the lever member 340, and defines the terminal end of the swinging motion of the lever member 340 at its end.

The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. , and in this state, the pedestal portion of the portion that supports the driving gear 337b can be fitted into the small circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b can be inserted through the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported in the second drive device 337 (requires a hole with a diameter equal to or greater than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b), and the inserted second drive device 337 can be It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having a diameter similar to that of the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

The insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes in this embodiment. That is, a guide support hole 332e1 formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and through which the angle regulating rod member 346 of the lever member 340 is guided, and a rectangular shape disposed on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole arranged at a position where the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is rotated about the shaft support 332g. and a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 that detect the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft supports 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring engaging portions 331h and 332h are arranged in front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend laterally outward of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332, respectively.

In this embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 abuts the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end abuts the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 onto the annular protrusion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 335a and driven to rotate. The driving gear 335b is meshed with the body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333 to transmit the driving force.

The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and includes a main body portion 336a having a substantially L-shaped hook shape on the distal end side, and a shaft that is bored through the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped protrusion extending from the base end side of the body portion 336a outward in the axial radial direction of the shaft support hole 336b. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided, and a plate-like detection piece 336e extending radially outwardly of the shaft support hole 336b and capable of passing through the gap between the sensor members 331f.

The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted.

The second driving device 337 mainly includes a driving motor 337a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 337a and driven to rotate. The drive gear 337b meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336 to transmit the driving force.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that engages and rotates. The member is meshed with gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and gear damper receiving members 342 and posture detection members 343, which are fastened and fixed to the left and right sides of the lever member 340, and an anti-breakage mechanism. A disassembled state of the peeling member 350 arranged as .

The rear-side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes toward the rear side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) toward the front side from the protruding tip, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (see FIG. 17(b). )reference). An insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening, is provided in the recessed portion. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 includes a main body member 341 made of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section. A gear damper receiving member 342 having a substantially circular outer shape when viewed, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342 and which has a substantially circular outer shape when viewed in the axial direction and is fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. A posture detection member 343 that is fixed, an upper cover member 344 that is formed in a shape that fits over the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and a main body member 341 that sandwiches the upper cover member 344. A lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, an angle regulating rod member 346 inserted through the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the posture detecting member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 are coaxial with each other. It mainly includes a pivotally supported peeling member 350 and an oscillating member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 .

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular portion 342a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. The posture detecting member 343 has a tubular portion 343a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a position farthest from the tubular portion 343a (back side in FIG. 11). and a plate-like sensor detection piece 343b extending along.

Cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions that are inserted through shaft holes 341b of main body member 341, and lever support shafts 331d1 (see FIG. 10) are inserted through the inner peripheral sides thereof. This allows the lever member 340 to swing about the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342 b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10 ), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340 .

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that can detect the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18(c)).

The peeling member 350 includes a plate-like body member 351 provided with an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and through which the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted; It mainly includes a fixed rectangular raising member 353 and a magnet member 354 arranged on the upper side of the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and made of a magnetic material.

The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 , so that the main body member 341 and the main body member 351 are united or separated.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340. FIG.

A body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a body portion 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the body portion 341a, and a pair of shaft holes 341b. A regulation hole 341c is drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and a regulating hole 341c extends downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a at the front side end of the main body 341a. a pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left and right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left and right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. and a regulating hole 341f.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation bar member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which a support rod 363 that supports the swinging member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which a regulation rod 365 that regulates the swinging angle of the swinging member 360 is inserted. is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the buffer member 364 is provided around the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG.

The upper cover member 344 is made of a resin material and fastened to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has a curved surface on the back side along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. a guide portion 344a, an outer fitting portion 344b formed continuously with the guide portion 344a and having a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, the guide portion 344a and the outer fitting portion 344b. and a connecting portion 344c that connects the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is thinned (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is made of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below. an outer fitting portion 345b having a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below; It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c that is disposed on the side and is curved toward the front side, and a front guide portion 345d that extends from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The rear guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. As shown in FIG. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the rear guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the rear guide portion 345 a and the guide portion 344 a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330 .

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swinging of the body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the oscillating member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in. The front guide portion 345d allows the oscillating member 360 to move in the axial direction. positional deviation is suppressed.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the body member 341 (made of metal material) of the lever member 340 from coming into direct contact with the body member 341 . That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 made of a resin material between them, it is possible to mitigate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The oscillating member 360 is arranged at the front end of the body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is capable of swinging around the shaft hole 341e. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a disposed thereon and having a U-shaped cross section is engaged with the wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and is coaxially supported with the main body member 361. a plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted through the shaft holes 361c and 341e of the body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 is fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. A cushioning member 364 to be fitted, a torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the cushioning member 364, a cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and a motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. and a vibrating device 366 mainly composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibrations in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the body.

The main body member 361 includes a pair of plate-shaped side walls 361a that are arranged to face each other, a front wall 361b that connects the side walls 361a at the ends on the front side, and a pair of side walls 361a that are coaxially and circularly perforated. A shaft hole 361c into which a buffer member 364 is fitted, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which a regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a and a It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e that is bent in directions away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle around the shaft hole 361c, the body member 361 can be moved while the back side end of the side wall portion 361a is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c. can be oscillated.

The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the cushioning member 364 similarly to the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress transmission of vibration generated on the swing member 360 side to the body member 341 side of the lever member 340 .

The angle regulation hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 made of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulation hole 361d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically engaged with the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , is mainly provided.

The body portion 362a has a protrusion 362a1 protruding from the front side, and is locked by inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole drilled in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is provided with a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e, and is a portion that is externally supported by the cushioning member 364. The side wall portion 362b is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swinging member supporting portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the main body member 341 from the outside. is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Among those externally supported by the cushioning member 364, the body member 361 is fitted onto the base portion 364b, and the body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are fitted onto the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of an electromagnetic force. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged to form a disk shape. and a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

The torsion spring SP2 has one end locked to the body member 341 and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362 . In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swinging member 360 in a direction in which it falls with respect to the main body member 341 .

13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to a back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11), and the back side frame member 311 is fastened and fixed to a fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. and a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 of the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disc shape without a hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the center of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched between the vibrating member 314 through which the light guide member 313a projecting from the center is inserted. A switch member 315 arranged to face the vibrating member 314, an intermediate member 316 externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 accommodated on the back side and externally supported by the vibrating member 314. and a lens member 317 .

With the configuration described above, the swing operation member 310 has the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 fixed to each other. .

The intermediate frame member 312 includes an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to a plane formed by the bottom portion 312a. A plurality of columnar switch support rods 312c erected from the bottom 312a, and a back button member 312d movably arranged in the front-rear direction on the upper back side of the bottom 312a.

The bottom portion 312a includes rectangular recessed portions 312a1 recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted. , the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312 .

The switch support rod 312 c is a member that is commonly inserted through the vibration guide member 313 , the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 . This can prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 operate in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the oblique direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance to the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. . In addition, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, or a reciprocating motion in which the member moves in a straight line, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and then returns.

The back button member 312d is normally arranged in a position protruding toward the back side by a coil spring interposed between it and the bottom portion 312a, and has a plate-like detection piece 312d1 in the central portion on the front side.

The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 313a erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end arranged on the front side. It mainly includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c provided and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member having a light emitting member such as an LED arranged on the back side thereof. The light guide member 313 a is inserted through the vibrating member 314 , the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 , so that the distal end portion of the light guide member 313 a is arranged opposite (arranged close to) the lens member 317 . Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 operate in the front-rear direction (the stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from tilting in the operating direction. In addition, the switch member 315 can be prevented from contacting the light guide member 313a by tilting and damaging the light guide member 313a.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that a detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21(a)) provided on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap, thereby detecting the arrangement of the switch member 315. As shown in FIG.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swing posture of the swing operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 includes a main body portion 314a having a substantially disk-like cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole in the center, and a plurality of switch support rods 312c ( switch support holes 314b (four places in this embodiment), a central cylindrical portion 314c projecting from the central portion of the body portion 314a toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and around which the oscillating coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. a switch receiving member 314d that is inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the body portion 314a; and a light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The compression coil spring CS2 has a smaller elastic modulus than the oscillating coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portions 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the four concave portions formed on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a larger diameter than the switch support hole 314b on the front side. The portion 314d1 is engaged with the switch support hole 314b. The pressing coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a disk-shaped body portion 315a, a spring receiving portion 315b projecting from the center of the body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13) on a cup, and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged in the vertical center (vertical center in FIG. 13). Guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, arm 315f inserted and locked in concave portion 312a1, and first sensor member 313c. ), a plate-like detection piece 315g protruding on the back side.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c and smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Thereby, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction approaching the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315 e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314 d , it is possible to suppress the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 .

The intermediate member 316 has a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14(b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14(c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). 4 is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member 333 taken on line. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a body portion 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical portion 333b arranged coaxially with the rotation axis of the body portion 333a, and a cylindrical portion 333b. A cam portion 333c, which extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is formed slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b and has a hollow interior, and a cam portion 333c extending axially along the tip of the cylindrical portion 333b. A pair of cutouts 333d, a plate-like rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in a direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped canopy that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. A part 333f is mainly provided.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged with a shift in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends (elastically deforms) inward, thereby absorbing the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape and is eccentrically fixed to the body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for keeping the relative phase with the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) unchanged, and a pair of notches arranged oppositely are formed with different lengths in the circumferential direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by being reversed by 180 degrees.

By arranging the rib portion 333e in such a manner as to connect the cam portion 333c at a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b and the cylindrical portion 333b, the hollow cam portion 333c has the highest strength. It can improve the strength of weakened parts. As a result, damage to the cam portion 333c can be suppressed.

In addition, the rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Accordingly, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. parts can abut each other. As a result, the fatigue of the rib portion 333e can be suppressed while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of deflection (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), thereby improving the durability of the rib portion 333e. can be made

15(a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15(b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15(c) is a line XVc-XVc of FIG. 15(a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member 334 at line; In addition, in FIG. 15(c), the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17(a)) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and includes a shaft support portion 334a that is externally fitted and supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and its shaft support portion. An enlarged diameter portion 334b connected to 334a and enlarged in diameter (diameter enlarged in two steps) toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15(c)), and an axial direction from the front end of the enlarged diameter portion 334b. It mainly includes a plate-like detection piece 334c extending from the bottom and a detent projection 334d having a shape that matches the notch 333d.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is fitted onto an annular projection 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. As shown in FIG. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner side surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 on the outer side surface of the annular convex portion 332i from the inner peripheral side, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be strengthened. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, it is possible to suppress axial displacement when the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 receives a load from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c can pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the engagement of the anti-rotation projection 334d and the notch 333d detects the attitude of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase to the phase detection member 334 remains unchanged. can do.

16(a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16(b) is a side view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16(a), and FIG. FIG. 16B is a top view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, compared to the shaft hole 341b, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the body member 341 and is lower than a straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b (see FIG. 16A). ) below). As a result, the load generated on the swing member 360 side can be suppressed from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 , and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340 .

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the body member 341 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is disposed on the open side of the U-shaped. A slight gap is provided between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 .

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 (lower side in FIG. 16B) with the peeling member 350. can be secured.

In addition, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). Movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. When the member 340 receives an overload and the peeling member 350 is separated from the body member 341, the body member 341 can be prevented from swinging at high speed due to the momentum of the applied load.

17(a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position (a state in which the player presses down).

18(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 18(b) is a portion of the operation device 300 along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. 17(a). 18(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a). 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18(a). 18(b) and 18(c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18( a ), when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 contacts the lower side surface of the peeling member 350 . Since the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions by the lock member 336 coming into contact with the upper side surface, the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is pivoted about the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 from the portion where the lock member 336 blocks the swinging of the peeling member 350. is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state in which the rocking of the peeling member 350 is blocked by the lock member 336 can be adjusted by design.

In this embodiment, when the distance between the rotating shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is the shortest, that is, when the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350, the tubular portion 333b The locking member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is in contact with the peeling member 350 .

In other words, the length of the body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 while the peeling member 350 is in contact with the cylindrical portion 333b. .

Therefore, when the locking member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always positioned on the lower side of the peeling member 350. is abutted on the side of the Therefore, when the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position and an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is overloaded. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being caught, and it is possible to suppress the breakage of the eccentric cam member 333 .

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the rear side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 plays a role of generating viscous resistance to the rocking motion of the lever member 340, and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing backward. have a combination of

By arranging the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is greatly increased. On the other hand, the resistance can be reduced when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

As a result, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only in a state in which the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. By doing so, it becomes possible to bring the locking member 336 into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 .

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 has not swung from the state shown in FIG. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341 .

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along line XX-XX in FIG. 17(b). Note that illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by a coil spring, so that a pressing load (upward in FIG. 20) is applied. In a state in which no additional load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pressing load (upward load in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap between the second sensor members 313d. It is possible to detect that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

21(a) and 21(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 21(a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the state of FIGS. 18(a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, ) and the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state in FIG.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312. The vibrating member 314 is connected to the vibrating coil spring CS1. is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21(a)).

From this state, an electric current is passed through a copper wire (not shown) wound around a bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366. When the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by an electromagnetic force generated, the vibrating member 314 moves toward the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pushed. As a result, the lens member 317 externally fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21(a)). In this state, the stepped portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, making it difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to be pushed).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing of the player's input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314 .

In addition, since the pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and the pushinhibited state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is not affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

For example, when the player intermittently and repeatedly pushes (hit) the lens member 317, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the reaction causes the lever member 340 to move the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18(a)). ))), the swing operation member 310 receives a load. Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in disabled state is established, the swing operation member 310 as a whole is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18(a)). move in the direction Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 from colliding with each other due to the swing operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method for constructing the push-incapable state, there is a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-shaped claw, or a method of moving the lens member 317 to the end position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. A method of overhanging (continuing to apply a load in one direction) and the like are exemplified. According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the end position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, vibrating the lens member 317 by the vibrating device 366 and making the lens member 317 unable to be pushed. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the electromagnetic force, there is a possibility that the moving speed of the vibrating member 314 becomes slow. , and moves downward in FIG. 21(b).

This makes it possible to speed up the vibration of the lens member 317 without fastening the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314 together.

In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the oscillating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317 . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the stepped portion 317a formed on the rear side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, whereby the lens member is pushed. 317 and vibrating member 314 move integrally with switch member 315 . Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the oscillating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the oscillating coil spring CS1 from acting as resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that contacts the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18(a)).

That is, the pressing coil spring CS2 that restores the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 that restores the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

In this embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pressing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the oscillating coil spring CS1, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while securing a high speed for returning the oscillating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the easiness of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while securing the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22(a) and 22(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 22(a) and 22(b) show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22(a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. FIG. 22(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed to the rear side (right side in FIG. 22(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 22(a).

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) to lift the swing operation member 310 about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22(a)) from the state of FIG. 22(a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

Swinging of the lever member 340 due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of locations that are abutted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Each contact point will be described in detail below.

Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted through the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the pivoting of the lever member 340 can be stopped by the angle regulating rod member 346 coming into contact with the ends of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. can be done. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction. tilting in the turning direction can be suppressed.

A connecting portion 344 c of an upper cover member 344 can come into contact with the upper cover 322 . The connecting portion 344c has a step portion 344c1, which is a portion that vertically abuts on the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22(a)). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the stepped portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space. can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of impact to the main body member 341, so that the structure of the main body member 341 can be simplified, and the weight of the entire lever member 340 can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and along with this, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

Further, the upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering inside the inner case member 330 in addition to the role of absorbing the impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23(b)), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always kept closed, so that dust does not enter inside the inner case member 330. and balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can abut against the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the direction of the swing axis (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 22(a)). Thus, the upper cover member 344 can be used to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 . By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 directed toward the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibrating device 366 in the vibrating direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibration device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is provided between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364 . As a result, vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between straight line L1 and straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of lever member 340 is defined as angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. It is possible to suppress the load (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) of the lens member 317 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibration device 366 is arranged on the front side (the left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibration device 366 operates pushes the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 downward. be directed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibrating device 366 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device 366 .

As shown in FIG. 22(b), when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load directed toward the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310 .

When the swing operation member 310 is pressed, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component of the vibration of the vibration device 366 along the straight line L2 can be made smaller than in the state of FIG. 22(a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310 .

Also, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. A plurality of types of vibrations, ie, vibrations in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibrations in which the swing operation member 310 rotates about the shaft support rod 363 can be produced.

23(a) is a cross-sectional view of operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a), and FIG. 23(b) is a cross-section of operation device 300 taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17(a). It is a diagram. 23 shows a state in which the body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 while the rocking of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down. A cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of load (a load greater than the attractive force due to magnetic force) is applied in the direction in which the lens member 317 is pushed in, or a predetermined amount or more of a load is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down (a magnetic force). When a load greater than the attractive force is applied, the body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354, and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the locking member 336 and the peeling member 350, and damage to the locking member 336 and the peeling member 350 can be suppressed.

In addition, the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down. Since no load is transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, the removal of the peeling member 350 from the body member 341 can be detected by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2.

In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. As a result, the lever member 340 swings excessively, which may put a burden on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swinging operation member 310 are arranged facing each other and come into contact with each other. Even if it rotates too much, the load can be relieved by deforming the rear side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

23(a), the body member 341 is swung clockwise in FIG. is again adsorbed to the peeling member 350 . Thereby, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swing shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 causes the main body member 341 to swing. It does not affect the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341 . That is, when the peeling member 350 is pulled off, the moment applied to the main body member 341 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. can be done.

In addition, the body member 341 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 moves in such a manner as to enter from the open side of the U-shaped body member 341 to the closed side of the U-shaped body member 341 . If frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

The biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and is not transmitted to the peeling member 350. Therefore, when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated, the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam is pressed. It is possible to prevent the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the locking member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are separated.

23(a), the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336, so that the sensor detecting piece 343b enters the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 again, thereby It is possible to detect that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24(a) and 24(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 24(a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 has been swung from the state shown in FIG. 22(a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24(a)), 24(a), the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated about 180 degrees and the lever member 340 is swung. Also, the external shapes of the lever member 340 and the swinging operation member 310 in a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap between the sensor members 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 has swung toward the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 has rocked to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first driving device 335, and the lever member 340 is rocked. can be made The eccentric cam member 333 may be rotated continuously in one direction, or the direction of rotation may be switched midway.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 (clockwise direction in FIG. 24(a)). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 . As a result, the player's attention can be easily focused on the swing operation member 310 .

When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24(a) or FIG. 24(b), the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366 can be suppressed.

Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward (see FIG. 24 ( a) There is a possibility that the swinging operation member 310 will be pushed (clockwise in FIG. 24(a)).

In this embodiment, in any case, a load acts to swing the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333, so that the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. can be suppressed. Thereby, durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 25(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 24(b), and FIG. 2, the state in which the eccentric cam member 333 has been rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of 1 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. 25(a) and 25(b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swinging operation member 310 in a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, the swinging member 360 is urged forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25), so that the player can easily hold and push down the swinging operation member 310 . That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25(a)) from the state of FIG. The swinging operation member 310 can be pushed down immediately without the operation of swinging it about 363 .

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, it becomes possible to force the lever member 340 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (Fig. 25(a) and 25(b), the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged because the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the imaginary line position to the solid line position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, damage to the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented. That is, the load from the lever member 340 is received by the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333, and damage to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate regardless of the direction of rotation, thereby allowing the lever member 340 to swing. Here, the characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

25(a) shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as the "retraction phase") when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24(a)). indicates the rotation angle of That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25(a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise by an angle φ1.

FIG. 25(b) shows the rotation angle from the phase (retraction phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24(a)). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 in FIG. 25(b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise by an angle φ2. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1<φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracted phase will increase the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 333. can be shortened compared to when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (angle φ2).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state in which the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. and the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 abut in FIG. It can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 abut against each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut against each other is reduced. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated continuously in the same direction because there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 and operates it. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25(b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of angle φ2 in FIG. The distance from 331d1 to the abutting position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member is increased), so even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction approaching the lever member 340, the possibility of damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is reduced. can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of angle φ1 in FIG. The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocatingly rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 26(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is swung backward (clockwise in FIG. 26(a)) from the state in FIG. 24(b). 26(a), the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase, and the state in which the lever member 340 is swung until it abuts against the eccentric cam member 333 is shown. sight is omitted.

Here, when an operation to push down the lever member 340 exclusively is required while the lever member 340 is rocked by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26(a). Normally, the swing operation member 310 does not swing backward (clockwise in FIG. 26(a)). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed, it is possible to detect that the player has performed an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340 . Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is prevented from being damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26(b). can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26(b), the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is moved away from the lever support shaft 331d1. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 27(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has been pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 24(a), and FIG. 27(b) shows a swing operation from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise about the pivot rod 363 is shown in FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 24(a), when a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. Next, from the state of FIG. 27(a), when a force is applied along the direction D2, which is the direction opposite to the direction D1, the swing operation member 310 is moved around the pivot rod 363 while the posture of the lever member 340 remains unchanged. can be oscillated. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating). can be made easier.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the fixed state is maintained by the attraction force of the magnet member 354), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operational feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the swinging operation member 310 is operated to swing, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, thereby rotating the lever member 340 in the direction opposite to that shown in FIG. 27(b). A load is applied in the direction of clockwise rotation. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed at the position shown in FIG. 27(a) when the swing operation member 310 is operated to swing, and the swing operation member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. can make it easier to

Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. FIG. In the first embodiment, the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed. The body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported are separate members. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the second embodiment, the torsion spring SP21 exerts an urging force in the direction to raise the lever member 2340, and the torsion spring SP22 exerts a biasing force in the direction to rotate the swing operation member 310 backward (clockwise in FIG. 28(a)). A biasing force acts.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound around a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) and supported, with one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 2362 . In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swinging member 2360 in a backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341 .

FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 28(a) and 28(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336, and in FIG. 28(b) the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the pivot rod 363 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 28(a) is taken as the initial position, and in FIG. 28(a), the posture P21 to which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the recoil of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 is illustrated by imaginary lines. be done. Also, FIG. 17A shows the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, but since it has the same appearance as the operation device 2300, it will be regarded as the operation device 2300 and explained. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of electromagnetic force. A bobbin member 2366a which is a cylindrical member around which a copper wire is wound, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. and a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are coaxially arranged and connected by a disc-shaped plate. The pressing member 2366b has an inner cylinder made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the center axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is located on the front side of the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (a) left) are spaced apart.

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as the operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold it for presentation purposes. However, it is difficult to detect whether or not the player has gripped the swing operation member 310 . For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time. stress.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the pivot rod 363, so that the reaction to the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 reciprocates the swinging member 2360. The attitude of the swing operation member 310 changes between the attitude shown in FIG. 28(a) and the attitude P21 in a reciprocating manner. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21). ), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310 .

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the force of the grip, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so a signal is detected by the second sensor member 313d. pattern changes. By detecting this change, it can be detected that the player has already grasped the swing operation member 310 .

Since no reaction force is generated when the swing operation member 310 is held, the force required by the player is small. In addition, it is only necessary that the player's hand covers the swinging operation member 310 (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). Since it is only necessary to do so, the player's stress can be reduced.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not the player is in the operation preparation stage) without requesting the player to operate the push button, so the effect proceeds. The timing can be set to the timing when the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the player's stress caused by requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swinging member 2360 is used as a pivot, the vibration transmitted to the player side is increased by aligning the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation axis of the swinging member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). As a result, loosening of fastening screws and deterioration of members occur at an early stage, resulting in a problem that the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310. Vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the presentation effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d has a lock release shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28(a)) extending parallel to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

29(a) and 29(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 2300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position with the lock member 2336 placed on the release side. 29(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29(a) to the end of rotation in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 remains stationary until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344 .

When the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swinging range (see FIG. 29A) and a load is applied to the swinging operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swinging operation member 310, the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down. It rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29(a)). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally pushes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent loading.

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the unlocking cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the unlocking side (see FIG. 29(a)) are driven together. It is rotated by gear 335b. As a result, the second driving device 337 (see FIG. 10) can be dispensed with and the product cost can be reduced. The eccentric cam member 2333, unlocking cam member 2339, and locking member 2336 will be described below.

30(a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30(b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30(a). 30(c) is a front view of a body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30(d) is a side view of the body member 2333a viewed in the direction of arrow XXXd in FIG. 30(c). In addition, in FIG.30(c) and FIG.30(d), the main-body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the cam member 2333b includes a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circular portion inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 which extends in the axial direction along the length of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and which is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and has a hollow interior, and a pair of notches axially cut at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A notch 2333b3, a plate-like rib portion 2333b4 that connects the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and a protrusion provided from the rib portion 2333b4 parallel to the axis of the tubular portion 2333b1. It mainly includes a projecting portion 2333b5.

The projecting portion 2333b5 is a projection disposed at a position spaced radially from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and inserted into the annular recessed portion 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The projecting portion 2333b5 has side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30(a)) arranged in a manner that intersects the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and has a curved surface shape that conforms to a circular shape centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. formed by

The cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical idea is common, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30(c) and 30(d), the main body member 2333a has a shaft hole 2333a2 with a circular cross section which is supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 having gear teeth formed on its outer peripheral surface to mesh with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10), and a disc portion 2333a1 extending along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. , and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is annularly arranged along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The circular concave portion 2333a3 has a radius R22 that is the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the circular concave portion 2333a3, and has a radial width that is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In this embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to the deformation R21 (radius R21=radius R22). In addition, the recess depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is longer than the projection length of the projecting portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recessed portion 2333a3, when the projecting portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the cam member 2333b is disengaged from the lever member 2340. When subjected to an excessive load, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the projecting portion 2333b5 escapes from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, thereby suppressing deterioration due to the magnets rubbing against each other.

31A and 31B are views showing an assembly of the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31(c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. Note that FIG. 31(c) shows a state in which the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31(a). In D12(b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially shown in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), when the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported on the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the projecting portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the projecting portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in a mutually attracting direction. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can be rotated integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recessed portion 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load greater than the attraction force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. can let That is, as shown in FIG. 31(a), from a state in which the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b are aligned, the main body member 2333a By applying a rotational load to the fixed cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be shifted from each other as shown in FIG. 31(c).

Fig. 32(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, Fig. 32(b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as seen in direction XXXIIb of Fig. 32(a), and Fig. 32(c) ) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as seen in direction XXXIIc of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed in the same size as the body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof to mesh with the driving gear 335b. A portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the body portion 2339a and through which the lock release shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending radially outward along the front side surface of the body portion 2339a. A releasing portion 2339c formed with a length capable of coming into contact with the locking portion 2666d of the locking member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the releasing portion 2339c. 2339d and .

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between detection sensors (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33(b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 as seen in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG. 33(a).

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and has a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape on the distal end side, and a base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which a lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlocking cam member of the body portion 2336a. 2339 and a locking portion 2336d protruding above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface opposite to 2339 (left side in FIG. 33(b)).

The main body portion 2336a has an L-shaped hook-shaped tip, and when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that contacts the lever member 2340 from the lower side) contacts the lever member 2340, the force for rotating the lock member 2336 increases. It is considered as a mode.

The guide hole 2336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion that is pushed from the releasing portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). A torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 is always biased toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28(a)).

34 and 35 are front views of lever member 2340, eccentric cam member 2333, locking member 2336 and unlocking cam member 2339 illustrating in chronological order that lever member 2340 swings due to rotation of drive gear 335b. is.

FIG. 34(a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from rocking by the lock member 2336, and FIG. FIG. 34(c) shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34(b). 34(d) shows a state in which the unlocking cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34(c) and the lock member 2336 has returned to the fixed position.

FIG. 35(a) shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 is in contact with the lever member 2340 on the opposite side (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees) of the cylindrical portion 2333b1. 35(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35(a) and the lever member 2340 contacts the lock member 2336 from above, A state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when it is necessary to rotate the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 by an angle of θ21 until it comes into contact with the engaging portion of the locking member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 rotates at an angle of θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until it reaches the state shown in FIG. 34(b), the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronism with the unlocking cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34(a) (see FIG. 34(b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b is rotatable relative to the main body member 2333a, even if the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled with a phase shift, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled by the lever member. 2340 can prevent damage to the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10).

After the unlocking cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the unlocking cam member 2339 starts to move the locking member 2336 to the unlocking side, thereby releasing the restriction on the swinging of the lever member 2340. Rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are magnetically attracted to each other and rotate together.

When the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 slips out of the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34(d)), the rear end of the lever member 2340 is released regardless of timing. (Fig. 34(a) right end) presses the curved surface of the hook-shaped portion of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 toward the release side, and further lowering the rear end of the lever member 2340. , the oscillation is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the direction to lift it, and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 descends, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34(d), 35(a) or 35(b), the lever member 2340 is oscillated to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336, thereby restricting the oscillating movement.

Here, as a countermeasure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is made of an elastic material such as rubber so that the member is elastic. A possible method is to release the load by deformation. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagging or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). can prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIG. 34(d), FIG. 35(a), or FIG. 35(b)), the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (sliding relative to the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swinging is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, the posture of the cam member 2333b is the same (see FIG. 35(c)), but the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIG. 34(d), FIG. 35(a)). Or see FIG. 35(b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock release cam member 2339 moves the lock member 2336 to the release side again is different, which makes it difficult to determine the timing of starting the drive of the lever member 2340. was there.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 and the lock release cam member 2339 can be phased by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the rocking of the lever member 2340 is restricted by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34(b)), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to easily match the timing of starting driving.

Next, referring to FIG. 36, the body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described. FIGS. 36(a) to 36(c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated as viewed in the axial direction of the pivot rod 363. FIG. Note that FIG. 36(a) shows a state in which the body member 2361 is pivotally arranged at the end of the backward roll side (see FIG. 28(a)), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is pivotally arranged (see FIG. 28(b)) is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which it is slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the body member 2361 is a member that is coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12) and is supported by the shaft support rod 363, and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. an elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c; and the fixed plate portion 361e extending from the upper end of the angle regulation hole 361d. and a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

As a result, unless the main body member 2361 is pivotally arranged at least at the end on the forward roll side, the pivot rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only the swing motion about the pivotal support rod 363 .

Next, referring to FIG. 37, motor fixing plate 2362 will be described. 37(a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37(b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 as viewed in the direction of XXXVIIb in FIG. 37(a), and FIG. 37B is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37(b); FIG. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed in such a shape that the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b are extended rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. a pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the sides, a U-shaped member 2362d slidably disposed on the rod-shaped portions 2362c and formed with a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g; Mainly provide

The side wall portion 2362b has a long hole 2362b1 drilled along the extending direction of the body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged such that the crotch width of the U-shaped member 2362d is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is biased in a direction away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. , the pivotal support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is placed at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the pivotal support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

That is, by switching whether to apply a load to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether to allow the body member 2361 to move along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member for sliding the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, a plate-like first release member 2370 is disposed inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 is provided. A plate-like second releasing member 2380 is mainly provided so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the provided through hole.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so as to be slidable on the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 28(a)), and the second release member 2380 is arranged to slide along the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28(a)). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Also, in the first releasing member 2370, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first releasing member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. shape. The second release member 2380 is arranged such that the swinging operation member 310 is positioned downward and the swinging member 2360 is rotated to be positioned at the end of the swing in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is positioned above the second release member 2380. It has a shape that abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29(b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29(a)) is slid, but the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29(a)) is slid. Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

Figures 38(a) and 38(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 2300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 38(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28(a) and placed in the downward position. 38(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 has been slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38(a).

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and rotated to be arranged at the end of the swing in the forward direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid, and the swing operation member 310 can be slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is peeled off the peeling member 350, so that the swing operation member 310 is already overloaded, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310 . Therefore, it can be determined that the player has not erroneously applied an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, but is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. can.

Therefore, for example, a detection sensor (not shown) detects that the state shown in FIG. and the operation device 2300 can be prevented from being destroyed.

If an excessive load is not applied to the swing operation member 310, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding. change can be prevented.

Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. In the first embodiment, the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. The driving force to move is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the third embodiment, the torsion spring SP31 exerts a biasing force in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward, and the torsion spring SP32 exerts a biasing force in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 falls forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound around the cushioning member 364 and supported, with one end locked to the front curved surface portion 345 c and the other end locked to the motor fixing plate 362 . In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swinging member 360 in the upward direction with respect to the main body member 341 .

FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 39(a) and 39(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, and in FIG. 39(b) the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the pivot rod 363 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 39(a) is the initial position. Although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17(a), it is assumed to be the operation device 3300 and will be described since it has the same appearance. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operating device 3300 in this embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism, which will be described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic member 3339 made of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal bar member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. .

A lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345. A rod-shaped member 3345f made of metal is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a pair of U-shaped magnets extending from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the rear side (right side in FIG. 39(a)). In this embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the S pole. The lower surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the trajectory along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 swings, it is possible to prevent the bar member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 .

Here, for example, when a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 39(a), an electromagnetic force is generated to move the rod-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right in FIG. 39(a)). When a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-like member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39(a)). These electromagnetic forces can swing the lever member 3340 .

FIG. 40(a) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 3300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). FIG. 40(a) illustrates a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the biasing force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In this embodiment, the lever member 3340 is biased forward by the torsion spring SP1, so that the lever member 3340 can start swinging by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

As in this embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is biased in the direction of falling forward, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side where the lever member 3340 approaches when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is provided. Since it is necessary to arrange the cam member, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the player's operation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member is eliminated and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by a solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 that constitutes the solenoid mechanism is arranged in such a manner that there is a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f that constitutes the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Thus, damage to the solenoid mechanism can be suppressed when the player presses down the swing operation member 310 .

FIG. 40(b) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 3300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 40(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 39(b), and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are separated.

The biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40(b)). The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move upward and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged is the direction in which the player stands up, the lever member 340 separates from the separation member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged when the player applies an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 . Even if this can be prevented, the swinging operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so the player does not notice that the overload is applied, and the swinging operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of overshooting.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the lever member 3340 is biased is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly applying an overload to the swing operation member 310 .

In this embodiment, a rod-shaped member 3345f that receives an electromagnetic force that drives the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341 . That is, in a state in which the body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force, so that the body member 341 can be swung.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), if the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 will move the lever member. When the rocking movement of the eccentric cam member 333 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also restricted (see FIG. 18(a)). Therefore, when the rocking motion of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, if the eccentric cam member 333 operates, a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 restricts the rocking motion of the lever member 3340, the rod member 3345f receives electromagnetic force and moves, thereby allowing the main body member 341 to rock. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350 .

Therefore, even if an electric current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the locking member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for rocking the main body member 341, causing the peeling member 350 to rock. Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the locking member 336 from being damaged.

FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 41(a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 40(b) in the upward direction, and FIG. 41(b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41(a). , the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung by the movement of the rod-shaped member 3345f under electromagnetic force. Here, when an eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the stripping member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 moves from the stripping member 350. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is torn off (see FIG. 23(b)).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. Body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the body member 341 can be swung.

40(b) until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by an angle α31, current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(b). 41(a) until the posture of the transmission part 3345e changes by an angle α32 from the state shown in FIG. 41(a). The body member 341 can be brought into the state shown in FIG. 41(b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state shown in FIG. 41(a) and the state shown in FIG. 41(b). As a result, it is possible to perform a teasing action that draws the player's attention to the operation device 3300 .

In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is fixed to the body member 341 by suction (see FIG. 40A), by reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the player is directed to the operation device 3300. Action can be performed. At this time, the path along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is torn off from the main body member 341. It is possible to cope with the case where the peeling member 350 is peeled off and the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed to the main body member 341 .

Note that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, so that the strength is the same. Even if a small amount of current is applied, the speed of the fanning motion can be varied. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

Figures 42(a) and 42(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the swing operation member 310 is not cross-sectionally shown but is shown as a side view, and the player's hand is shown as an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding. .

FIG. 42(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is placed in a downward position and the player's hand is placed over the swing operation member 310 from the back side (the right side in FIG. 42(a)). From this state, an electric current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface of FIG. By swinging the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 42(a)). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by covering the swing operation member 310 with the hand, and the input operation can be facilitated. In addition, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the timing at which the swing operation member 310 on which the player's hand is placed swings in the forward rotation direction). can be controlled. Therefore, without requiring the player to perform an input operation, by placing the hand over the swing operation member 310 and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the back button 312d can be input on the control side. You can decide when to operate. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced, for example, when performing an effect requiring input with good timing.

42(a), the lever member 3340 is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 42(a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 42(a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of modes of operation of the operation device 3300, it is possible to designate an operation method for inputting with good timing, and allow the player to operate the operation device 3300 in an appropriate manner.

This is not possible with the configuration in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed rearwardly and downwardly of the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is positioned on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect can be achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

Next, an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the locking member 336 restricts the swinging of the lever member 340 with the swinging operation member 310 arranged in the upward position. Lock member 4336 restricts swinging of lever member 4340 in a state where swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. 43, illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 which are assembled into a box-like shape in which the lever member 4340 is arranged, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by a shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by a lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331 . The drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in this embodiment are slightly different from the first embodiment in their arrangement and attitude, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of cylindrical rod-shaped members 4331d projecting rightward from the upper side wall portion 331b.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is composed of a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the top of the left cover member 4331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and arranged behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. and a lock shaft 4331d3.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 so as to be supported on both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 has a cam portion 4333c unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the eccentric cam has a larger diameter than the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a, and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c is closest to the lever member 4340, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of

The lock member 4336 is arranged in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 on which the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward, and the lock member 4336 is operated from below the lock receiving member 4350 . It is a member that abuts and restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 .

FIG. 44(a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44(b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 viewed in the XXXXIVb direction of FIG. 44(a).

The lock member 4336 includes a body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b formed in a plate shape with a fan-shaped cross section and to which the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by meshing gears. , is mainly provided.

The body member 4336a includes a body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape, and a body portion 4336a1 which is perforated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44(a)) and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. a locking portion 4336a3 projecting above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b; and a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (the right side in FIG. 44(b)) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

The engaging portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm of the torsion spring SP41, which is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and whose one arm is engaged with the connecting side wall portion 331c (see FIG. 45). As a result, the body member 4336a is always biased counterclockwise in FIG. 44(b).

The concave portion 4336a4 is a portion that contacts the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. By setting the depth of the concave portion 4336a from the back side to be equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is placed in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45(a)). The posture of 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (main body member 4336a is held in a state of being in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b includes a main body portion 4336b1 having a fan-shaped cross section and a curved surface portion formed with a gear portion that meshes with the drive gear 337b, and a main body portion 4336b1 having a left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44(a)). A shaft support hole 4336b2 which is drilled and through which a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-like detection piece 4336b3 which passes through a gap in a sensor member (not shown) and can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b, and a main body. It mainly includes a protruding portion 4336b4 that protrudes from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and contacts the recessed portion 4336a4 in the swinging direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The projecting portion 4336b4 is formed at the rear side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction to approach the connecting side wall portion 331c, the rear side surface of the main body member 4336a swinging by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. can.

45(a) and 45(b) are side views of the locking member 4336. FIG. 45(a) and 45(b), the driving gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled state.

The lock member 4336 can configure a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45(a) and a forced lock release state shown in FIG. 45(b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

In addition, the forced lock release state is a state in which the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340 . In the forcibly unlocked state, the projecting portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts the recessed portion 4336a4 to hold the posture of the main body member 4336a.

In the lock standby state, if the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the body member 4336a from above, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47(a)). When the state in which the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted is changed to the forced lock release state, the swinging restriction of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 is allowed to swing (see FIG. 48).

Here, by setting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and rotating the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 contacts the lock member 4336. As the end on the contacting side climbs over the lock member 4336, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted. On the other hand, by maintaining the forcibly unlocked state, it is possible to prevent the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. FIG. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 made of a metal material such as iron and shaped like a long rod with a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 supported coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, is mainly provided.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in such a manner as to compensate for the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a formed in the shape of a long bar with a U-shaped cross section and having a cutout on the left side of the rear end portion (the left side in FIG. 46), and the cutout of the front main body portion 4341a1. A rear main body portion 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section provided, and an electromagnet member M41 which is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body portion 4341a2 and attracts the rear main body portion 4341a2 and the front main body portion 4341a1 only when current is conducting. and a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the front body portion 4341a1.

The lock receiving member 4350 has a main body portion 4351 which is formed in a longitudinally elongated substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340. and a shaft hole 4352 that is bored in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear body portion 4341a2 can swing about the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

Figures 47(a) and 47(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 47(a) and 47(b) show a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, and in FIG. 47(b), the state shown in FIG. A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the pivot rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In this embodiment, the state of FIG. 47(a) is the initial position. In addition, although the operation device 300 is illustrated in FIG. 17(a), it is assumed to be the operation device 4300 and will be described since it has the same appearance. Hereinafter, the same applies to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swinging operation member 310 is swung while the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted, and the back button member 312d is pressed. can be done.

In this embodiment, since the lock member 4336 abuts against the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. can be done.

The rear end of the lever member 4340 abuts against the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, thereby suppressing the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the forcibly unlocked state (see FIG. 45(b)). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 falls forward (leftward in FIG. 47(a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state in which the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 . Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to malfunction or the like while the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, damage to the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 can be prevented. can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked from the state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47(a)), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied. As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so the degree of freedom in rendering is reduced. There was a problem that

It is also possible to vary the operating speed by varying the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340, and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 with the rocking motion of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the timing for swinging the lock member 4336 toward the forcibly unlocked state is determined by the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49(a)). It is preferable to detect after

Here, the reaction to the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward falling direction. The rocking speed and rocking mode of the member 4340 can be changed (slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from erroneously colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

Figures 49(a) and 49(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 49(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 49(a) rightward) is illustrated, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

49(a) and 49(b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the forced lock release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player grips the swing operation member 310 and moves it up and down from the state of FIG. When the user releases the hand, the swing operation member 310 returns to the upward position due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

FIGS. 50(a), 50(b), 51(a) and 51(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 50(a), 50(b), 51(a), and 51(b) show how the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 in chronological order. be.

FIG. 50(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50(a) by about 90 degrees from the state in FIG. 50(a).

51(a), the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 50(b), and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 to restrict the rocking movement. 51(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 has further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51(a) to enter the retreat phase (see FIG. 50(a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50(a), 50(b), 51(a) and 51(b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the eccentric cam member 4333 swings the lever member 4340 to move the swing operation member to the downward position (initial position).

The lock member 4336 is in a lock standby state. In this case, the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336 to rotate the lock member 4336 in a backward falling direction (see FIG. 50(b)). On the other hand, the lock member 4336 is always urged in the forward tilting direction by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). side (see FIG. 51(a)). Thus, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340 , the lock member 4336 automatically restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 .

Therefore, even if the player does not know when to push down the swinging operation member 310, the rocking operation of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336 by arranging the swinging operation member 310 in the downward position. can be done with certainty.

In the arrangement where the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51(a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 contacts the lever member 4340 . Therefore, in a state in which the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51(a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the same direction instead of being reversely rotated to return the eccentric cam member 4333. Member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, a detection device for detecting the timing of reverse rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 can be eliminated, and the first driving device 335 for driving the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily controlled.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50(a) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 reciprocatingly at an angle θ41 about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 can be rocked reciprocally at an angle θ42 about the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to perform a teasing action that draws the player's attention to the operation device 4300 .

At this time, the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and reciprocatingly rotated, thereby moving the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from the contact position to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep a long distance. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). can withstand).

In addition, by setting the lock member 4336 to the forcibly unlocked state, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the lever member 4340 from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly oscillated, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

FIG. 53(a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 4340 is a side view of a body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350. FIG. Note that FIG. 53(c) illustrates a state in which the front body portion 4341a1 has swung from the state of FIG. 53(a) in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the front body portion 4341a1 and the rear body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung unless a load greater than the attracting force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attracting force when current conduction is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front body portion 4341a1 and the rear body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53(c)).

54(a) and 54(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. Although FIG. 6 shows the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment have the same appearance, so the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment can be used as the pachinko machine. The description assumes that 4010 and operating device 4300 are shown.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the length of protrusion of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54(a), the swinging operation member 310 projects forward by a distance X41 compared to the state shown in FIG. 54(b).

In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54(b). Selection based on the condition can make the box smaller. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight rod, if the power is turned off while the rocking is restricted by the lock member 4336, even if force is applied to the swing operation member 310 from the outside, the swing operation member will not move. 310 cannot be placed in an upward position, and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be placed in a packing box.

In addition, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned upward, the swinging operation member 310 is erroneously positioned downward. There is a problem that the oscillating operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in a state of being bent.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the attraction force of the electromagnet member M41 integrating the body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 swings the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 in the upward direction. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged at the upward position during packing. Also, by turning off the power supply when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are independently driven has been described. synchronously driven. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 in the fifth embodiment. Note that the illustration of the right cover member is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a cylindrical lock release shaft arranged behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with the driving gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 supported by the locking shaft 4331d3.

56(a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56(b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56(a), and FIG. 56(a) is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG. 56(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a substantially D-shaped cam portion 5333c in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f partially provided with a notch 5333f1.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front. and a buffer portion 5333c2 that has a low height and absorbs the impact from the lever member 4340. In this embodiment, the thickness of the rigid portion 5333c1 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 when viewed from the front.

A notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the driving gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when the driving gear 355b is arranged to face the driving gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 . Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 is driven. , there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

In the present embodiment, the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, so the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the body portion 333a (downward in FIG. 56(b)), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the driving gear 335b.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57(a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, FIG. 57(b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57(a), and FIG. ) is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as seen in the LVIIc direction of FIG. 57(a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshing with the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. is formed, a shaft hole 5339b is drilled in the center of the body portion 5339a and through which the lock release shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the side surface of the front side of the body portion 5339a A releasing portion 5339c that extends and is formed with a length that can come into contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the locking member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Prepare the Lord.

The head portion 5339d has a notch 5339d1 partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. A notch 5339d1 of the head portion 5339d is a notch formed in a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b. It is a mark for aligning the initial phase of the unlocking cam member 5339 .

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the body portion 5339a (lower side in FIG. 57(b)), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the lock release cam member 5339 is inserted through the lock release shaft 5331d5, the lock release cam member 5339 cannot be inserted if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b.

That is, since the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted through the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only in a posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the driving gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct posture.

FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58(b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58(a). As shown in FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), the locking member 5336 is configured by a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a plate shape with a fan-shaped cross section. ) are not required.

The lock member 5336 includes a main body member 5336a formed in a long plate shape, and a main body member 5336a which is perforated in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58(a)) and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. and a locking portion 5336c projecting above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the body member 5336a facing the unlocking cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58(a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. This is the portion pushed from the releasing portion 5339c of the .

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 and a curved wall portion 5336a1 curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the side that contacts the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. A protruding portion 5336a2 protruding along a circle centering on the shaft support hole 5336b is mainly provided from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 .

The projecting portion 5336a2 has a lower end surface inclined upward toward the tip. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the projecting portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

59(a) and 59(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336; FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restrained from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59(b) shows the driving gear 335b rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 59(a). The lock release cam member 5339 presses the lock member 5336 to release the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, and the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 59( a ) and 59 ( b ), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged when the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player performs an operation to swing the swing operation member 310 up and down, since the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric Collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

This is an unavoidable problem when restricting the swinging of the lever member 4340 with the swinging operation member 310 arranged in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). This problem is solved by restricting the swinging motion of the lever member 4340 when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

Even if the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing control (see FIG. 59(b)) is mechanical. , the lever member 4340 can reliably come into contact with a specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (the position on the short diameter side, the position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

As shown in FIG. 59(b), when the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340 and the lever member 4340 contacts the eccentric cam member 5333, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 It assumes the position closest to member 4340 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the cam portion 5333c caused by the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

In addition, by arranging the cam portion 5333c on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swinging of the lever member 4340 immediately after the lock member 5336 is released from swinging the lever member 4340. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be ensured. That is, in the present embodiment, the rocking angle of the lever member 4340 ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is ensured. As a result, when the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, the upward movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17(b)) can be increased, and the swing operation member 310 has a dramatic effect. can be improved.

60(a) and 60(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336; In FIG. 60(a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. A state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid portion 5333c1, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be increased.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the driving device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam will collide with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not collide with the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 come into contact with each other, it is preferable to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to reduce the swinging speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the performance effect can be enhanced.

With synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid portion 5333c1 can come into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. Speed of action can be improved.

In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. , and the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is forced to be unlocked (see FIG. 48) in a state in which the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down. 4333 pushes up the lever member 4340 so that the lever member 4340 swings forward and the swing operation member 310 is placed in the downward position. Swinging can be regulated.

This suppresses the application of resistance from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly swung up and down (see FIG. 52). Driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the locking member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are synchronously controlled, the posture of the member (the unlocking cam member 5339 in this embodiment) that drives the locking member 5336 depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 . Therefore, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

For example, when the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the locking member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the locking member 5336 half a turn before the unlocking portion 5339c starts to push the locking member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the player's operation.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the swing operation member 310 is placed in the downward position by being operated by the player to swing the lever member 4340 forward. , restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 62).

However, if the lever member 4340 abuts against the lock member 5336 while being reciprocated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is reduced. It may become too large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed in the lock member 5336 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocatingly swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied from the lock member 5336 to the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

When the lever member 4340 swings forward from the state shown in FIG. 60(b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the projecting portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is turned toward the unlocked state. 60(a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction to enter the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, the swinging direction of the lever member 4340 can be restricted at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 swings back and forth.

Note that the unlocking cam member 5339 transmits the driving force to the locking member 5336 only when the locking member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59(b)). Transmission is cancelled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocatingly oscillated, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with it, and it is possible to prevent troubles such as collision with the lever member 4340 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), until the lock member 5336 is placed at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is placed at the upward position (posture in FIG. 59(b)). to maintain

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously controlled, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59(b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60(a)). , the eccentric cam member 5333 may cause the lever member 4340 to swing. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In this embodiment, the rigid portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line contacting the outer circumference of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60(a)), so that the eccentric cam member 5333 can move at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. 59(b) to the figure). 60(a)), the gap between the rigid portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is filled, and the swinging of the lever member 4340 can be suppressed. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61(a) and 61(b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61(a) until the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. be.

As shown in FIG. 61( a ), the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the projecting portion 5336 a 2 of the lock member 5336 , thereby rotating the lock member 5336 away from the lever member 4340 . When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). , and the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 .

Until the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 escapes from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from.

In addition, since the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. can be ensured to be large, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) can be ensured to be large. Therefore, the lock member 5336 can reliably restrict the movement of the lever member 4340 .

62 is a schematic diagram of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the player pushes down the lever member 4340 from the state shown in FIG. 60(b) in a forward tilting direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), a circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c around the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 contacts the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) when the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and placed in the downward position. 62), the eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59(a)).

Note that even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. clockwise) to swing the lever member 4340, and the locking member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) to restrict the swinging of the lever member 4340. can be done.

As a result, regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 after the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, thereby securing the swing width of the lever member 4340. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

63(a) and 63(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. 6333, a schematic diagram of the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63(b) shows the drive gear 335b rotated clockwise from the state in FIG. 63(a). The lock release cam member 5339 presses the lock member 5336 to release the lock member 5336 from swinging the lever member 4340, and the lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise).

As shown in FIG. 63(a), the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the lock release cam member 5339 contacts the lock member 5336, and the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. , and along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in an arrangement different from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), when the lock member 5336 is unlocked, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333 . Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the release timing of the locking member 5336 .

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64(a) and 64(b) show the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339, and the locking member 5336 in chronological order. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a locking member 5336;

In FIG. 64(a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. A state of abutting on the side surface is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 across the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lever member 4340 oscillates, the oscillation is blocked by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, since there is no risk of collision between the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload is generated when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. It is possible to shorten the period of time in which the state is arranged at the lower end). As a result, the period in which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64(a) can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing motion of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65(a) and 65(b) are schematic diagrams of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlocking cam member 5339 and the locking member 5336. FIG. 65(a) shows a state in which the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65(b) shows a state in which the driving gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. be done.

65(b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated to push up the rear end of the lever member 4340, and the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. As a result, the rocking motion of the lever member 4340 is restricted.

In this embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 64B and the state shown in FIG. , and the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated vertically (tilting operation).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64(b) and 65(a), the unlocking cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the locking member 5336 (the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member is separated from the locking member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 5336 from applying resistance to the lock release cam member 5339, and stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), the rear end of the lever member 4340 pushes up the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, thereby rotating the lock member 5336 away from the lever member 4340. As shown in FIG. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336 returns by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63(a)).

In addition, since the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the projecting portion 5336a2, the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. can be ensured to be large, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61(b)) can be ensured to be large. Therefore, the lock member 5336 can reliably restrict the movement of the lever member 4340 .

In the state shown in FIG. 65(a), let us consider the case where the player applies a load in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333, and the eccentric cam member 6333 rotates clockwise. In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are synchronously operated. The load applied may damage the eccentric cam member 6333 .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end portion is lowered from the state of FIG. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 moves away from the locking member 5336 . Therefore, there is no fear that the unlocking cam member 5339 will abut against the locking member 5336 and the rotation will be restricted.

In this embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 are located at different positions (Fig. are placed in a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 rotate in the direction of approaching each other in FIG. 65(a) from the state of FIG. Since they do not pass each other, damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 always applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. A case where gear damper 7347 applies resistance to lever member 7340 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 66(a) and 66(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 66(a) shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and in FIG. Member 7350 is shown torn away.

As shown in FIG. 66( a ), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the body member 341 . The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on the insertion hole 352 formed in the body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are fixed by suction and swung together, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(b), when the peeling member 7350 is restrained from swinging by the lock member 336 and is pulled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (when the player is necked). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is applied to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) to the extent that the lever member 7340 is pulled off the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the sense of operation when the player operates the swing operation member 310, and encourage the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66(b), if the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate it, causing stress. If the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced, making it easier for the player to operate. Therefore, the more the player tries to avoid stress, the more he or she avoids applying an excessive load to the swing operation member 310 . This can prevent the operation device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. FIG. In the above embodiments, the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330. However, as the lever member 340 swings, the inner case member 8330 can slide. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 67(a) and 67(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69 as well. Also, FIG. 67(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 67(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position. .

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the inner case member 8330 has a plurality of long-hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc about the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in a corresponding position of a right cover member (not shown) provided as a pair with the left cover member 8331 in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 .

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, a first slide hole 8331i1 having a smooth inner surface and disposed on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and a smooth inner surface. and a second slide hole 8331i2 arranged closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is an elongated hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The attitude of the lock member 8336 changes the frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 arranged to slide along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331 . The lock member 8336 is a columnar portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f that penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 that is part of the axial direction and is inserted through the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is formed with a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a that are separated from the side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67(a)) when they are arranged to face each other. , and a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that come into contact with the side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 (see FIG. 68(a)) in a state of facing each other. It is configured in a curved approximately rhombus shape.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is positioned on the release side. be. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b is formed from a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 when the lock member 8336 is positioned on the fixed side. It is formed.

When the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2, and a predetermined gap is provided. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 can be suppressed.

Note that FIG. 67(b) illustrates a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount. Even in this state, there is a slight gap between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 is slightly rotated from the release side position, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so the rocking resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player can rock the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing can be shortened. can do. This makes it easier to dispose the lock member 8336 at a desired position on the fixed side.

The slide plate 8370 includes a protruding portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and protrudes into an arcuate cross-section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is made of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 in such a manner that the rotating shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that is rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare the Lord.

The projecting portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is made of a magnetic material and adhered to the peeling member 350 . With the magnet member 8372 adhered to the separation member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 is swung.

The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged in the release side position (see FIG. 67(a)) and the fixed side position (see FIG. 68(a)). drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370 , it slides together with the slide plate 8370 .

The peeling member 350 has a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface. It is possible to detect whether An example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described below.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67(a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23(b) and 16) is arranged in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 (see FIG. 23(b)), so that the lever It is detected that member 340 is positioned at the end of its swing range. In addition, in the state of FIG. 67(b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23(b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. detected to be present.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67(a) and the state shown in FIG. It is possible to detect repeated operations in the maximum vertical movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, and the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

As in the first embodiment, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging is fixed. It was difficult to fix 340 with locking member 336 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 8336 is movable following the lever member 340, so that the lock member 8336 stops the rocking motion of the lever member 340 even during the rocking motion of the lever member 340. It is possible to Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the locking member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. can be done. This will be explained below.

Figures 68(a) and 68(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 68(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned between the upward and downward positions, and FIG. 68(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is shifted by a predetermined amount or more from the state in FIG. 68(a). is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 .

As shown in FIG. 68(a), by rotating the driving gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward in response to the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is engaged in the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. A slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains the posture in the state shown in FIG. 68(a) even if some load is applied in the vertical direction.

From the state of FIG. 68(a), when the player applies a downward load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68(b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged when a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is transmitted to the lock member 8336 .

As shown in FIG. 68(b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. However, contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 can prevent the lever member 340 from contacting the eccentric cam member 333 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so that the player can move the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, so the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. can.

Figures 69(a) and 69(b) are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 8300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIG. 69(a), the lever member 340 and the stripping member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are shown by imaginary lines, and the stripping member 8336 is shown with the lock member 8336 disposed on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are illustrated by solid lines in a state in which the magnet portion 8372 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. In FIG. The state arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69( a ), when the lever member 340 and the stripping member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 , the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the stripping member 350 . At this time, if a downward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (it is decelerated by frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i), and the peeling The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see solid line portion in FIG. 69(a)).

In this case, the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 upward, the peeling member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may damage the eccentric cam member 333 .

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350 . As soon as the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the separation member 350 and the magnet part 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69(b)). The upper surface of the locking member 8336 can be abutted against the lower surface of the member 350 .

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swinging operation member 310, the peeling member 350 contacts the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, and the downward force is applied. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the locking member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24(b)), the lock member 336 may be fixed side. , the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 side more than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state, , the stripping member 350 contacts the eccentric cam member 333 . Therefore, the effect of preventing breakage of the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 causes the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 to move in the same manner (the state where the peeling member 350 contacts both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). is maintained), by arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 , the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is positioned closer to the peeling member 350 than the eccentric cam member 333 . can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333 , and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333 .

It is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 when the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and the maximum diameter portion moves toward the peeling member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may cross the lock member 8336 and approach the peeling member 350. It's for.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a ninth embodiment will be described. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are all rigid bodies has been described. It has elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

70(a) and 70(b) are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is positioned downward, and FIG. 70(b) shows the swing operation member 310 facing downward in the state shown in FIG. 70(a). A load of a predetermined amount or more is applied, and a state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 70( a ) and 70 ( b ), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 that are arranged in the vicinity of the swinging operation member 310 as a pair of upper and lower coil spring-like elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to approximately the same length. In order to support the weight of the swing operation member 310 and maintain the state shown in FIG. The elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side is set higher than that of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70(b), when a load greater than or equal to a predetermined amount is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member The relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 collapsed, and a load was applied to the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (separation member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to the members inside the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) due to the load applied to the swing operation member 310. FIG.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. FIG. In the above embodiments, the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340. 2, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The operation device 10300 shown in FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 71(a), 71(b), 72(a) and 72(b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in the tenth embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 10300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. 73 and 74 are similarly substituted.

71(a) shows a state in which the swinging operation member 310 is positioned upward, and FIG. 71(b) shows the eccentric cam member 2333 moving from the state shown in FIG. ), the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 71(a) to the angle θ101 in FIG. 71(a). 72(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance. be done.

In this embodiment, a torsion spring SP101 made of an elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swing operation member 310 downward.

As a result, the lever member 340 is always urged in such a manner as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333 , so that the lever member 340 can be operated following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 .

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 is moved by pushing down the swing operation member 310. Even if a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 from the lever member 340 due to the lifting of the portion, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b slide to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, if the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 are in perpendicular contact with each other, the lever member 340 The load from the eccentric cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(a), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that contacts the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. is shifted by a predetermined angle from the rib portion 2333b4 (position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. can be slid Therefore, damage to the eccentric cam member 2333 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged rearwardly and upwardly of the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player erroneously lifts the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 moves away from the eccentric cam member 333. move in the direction Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340 .

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), a columnar member is arranged below the peeling member 350 to prevent the lever member 340 from swinging further (the posture shown in FIG. 71(a) is end position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71(b) to the state shown in FIG. 72(a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72(a) to the state shown in FIG. 71(b), the swing operation member 310 swings downward. By repeating clockwise and counterclockwise rotations of the eccentric cam member 2333 in this manner, the swinging operation member 310 can be reciprocated vertically (flashing motion). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. Also, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swing operation member is vertically reciprocated by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 be arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. It becomes easy to arrange the lever support shaft 331d1 on the player side (front side), whereby even when the notches 331c1 and 332c1 have the same length in the circumferential direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 is increased. can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the presentation effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72( b ), the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336 . Therefore, when a small load such as a player's hand is placed on the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

Figures 73(a), 73(b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 10300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). In FIG. 73(a), the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged at the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73(b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 from the state in FIG. From the state of FIG. 73(b), the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the state in which the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown. is illustrated.

In this embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . As a result, a load is applied to the swing operation member 310, and when the lever member 340 is separated from the peeling member 350 and moved, it is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 of the eccentric cam member 2333 (see FIG. 73). (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to this embodiment, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is reduced. A portion is used to peel off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 . Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the downward direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). Accordingly, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Since it is necessary to do so (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a sense of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340, thereby performing the swinging operation. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (tilting motion).

This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of uneasiness that accompanies the destructive action of peeling off the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350 .

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, and the player can feel the operation. can be given.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates at high speed. As a result, the player can be notified of the abnormality. For example, the characters "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the reciprocating motion of the lever member 340 up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 gives the player a reaction force to the operation. It can be used to provide a sense of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. The former case has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and the latter case has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched by changing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player is prompted to perform a predetermined operation or performs a predetermined operation. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an eleventh embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are not structurally linked. is increased by the pressing operation of the lens member 317 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

75(a) and 75(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 11300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. Further, FIG. 75(a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pushing load, and FIG. 75(b) shows the lens member 317 pushed from the state of FIG. 75(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the swinging operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a extends in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363. As shown in FIG. A pair of through holes are formed on both sides. Therefore, a through-hole is formed to extend from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 through the vibrating device 11366 . The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is made shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the pivot rod 363. As shown in FIG.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stopper 11314g inserted through the through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stopping portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted through the through holes of the pressing member 11366b, and is inserted through a pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and includes a pair of pinching portions 11314g1 that are shaped like leaf springs. .

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is placed at a position spaced apart from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75(a)), and when the lens member 317 is pushed (see FIG. 75(b)), the torsion spring It is arranged at a position sandwiching SP2. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to increase the resistance of the rocking motion centered on. That is, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, when the vibrating device 11366 operates, the vibration of the vibrating device 11366 is consumed as the driving force for swinging about the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation section, and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device 11366 transmitted to the player (Fig. 75(a) vertical direction) can be suppressed from decreasing.

In addition, while suppressing the swinging motion of the swing operation member 310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibrating device 11366 transmitted to the player is ensured so that the player can move the lens member 317 away from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 can cause the swing operation member 310 to swing.

Thus, the same vibrating device 11366 achieves the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of making the swinging operation member 11310 move more vigorously in the no-load state to attract the player's attention. can be made compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing operation of the lens member 317 increases the resistance of the swing operation member 11310. , the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361 d of the swing member 360 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

76(a) and 76(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Although FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, it has the same external shape as the operation device 12300 in the present embodiment, so it is used instead. Further, FIG. 76(a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 does not receive a pushing load, and FIG. 76(b) shows a state in which the lens member 317 is pushed from the state of FIG. 76(a). The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76( a ), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibrating member 12314 .

The intermediate frame member 12312 has a larger opening at the center of the bottom portion 312a than the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g extending downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a through the enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 . The pressing rod portion 12314g extends to a position where the tip thereof can abut against the regulation rod 365. As shown in FIG.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in an unloaded state (see FIG. 76(a)), and when the lens member 317 is pushed (see FIG. 76(b)), the regulating rod portion 12314g 365 is pushed. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulation hole 361d. In this state, the pivotal support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulating hole 361d, so that the swing operation of the swing operation member 12310 about the pivotal support rod 363 can be suppressed. That is, by pushing the lens member 317, the swinging resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, when the vibrating device 366 operates, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is consumed as the driving force for swinging about the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation section, and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device 366 transmitted to the player (Fig. 76(a) vertical direction) can be suppressed from decreasing.

In addition, while suppressing the swinging of the swinging operation member 12310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibrating device 366 transmitted to the player is ensured, so that the player can move the lens member 317 away from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can swing the swing operation member 12310 .

Thus, the same vibration device 366 achieves the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of attracting the player's attention by making the swing operation member 12310 move more vigorously in the no-load state. can be made compatible.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates the lever member 340, and during the rotation, the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340. In the operation device 13300 of the thirteenth embodiment, while the lever member 340 rotates, the swing operation member 310 moves against the lever member 340 in the direction opposite to the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 . It is possible to construct a displaced state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 77 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, the operation device 13300 is arranged such that the swing operation member 13310 protrudes from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. FIG. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 disposed inside the outer case member 13320 .

As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 has a rear side formed in a shape along the curved surfaces of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and is attached to the inner case member 13330 from the front side to the right and left of the cover members 344 and 345. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 attached in a manner to hide the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are respectively provided with long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a that are drilled in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portions.

The long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the front left cover 13321 and the front right cover 13322, respectively. Even if the shapes vary, the lateral positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted. As a result, it is possible to reduce lateral displacement between the wall member 13322b fitted to the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

The front left cover 13321 and the front right cover 13322 are fastened and fixed in the long adjustment holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 has a fitting recess 13322a recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 13322 that abuts against the left front cover 13321, and the fitting recess 13322a prevents slippage in the front-rear direction. and a wall member 13322b mounted in a manner such that, in a state where the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 so that the wall Member 13322b is retained within mating recess 13322a.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 13322b, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b receives the load from the posture correction device 13312 and is damaged). easy part). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. FIG. 79, illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and a state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support the lever support shaft 331d1 that supports the lever member 13340 and the eccentric cam member 5333. An eccentric cam shaft 331d2, a lock shaft 4331d3 on which a lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and a lock release cam member 5339 which is arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 and has a length shorter than that of the lever support shaft 331d1. and an unlocking shaft 13331d5.

A bent sheet metal member B13 is fixed to the tip of the lock release shaft 13331d5 by being fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331. As shown in FIG. As a result, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be pulled out from the unlocking shaft 13331d5.

Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed to be shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is not provided at the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not provided (the portion to the right of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating , it is possible to avoid interference between the unlocking shaft 13331d5 and the lever member 13340.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332 which are assembled into a box shape in which the lever member 13340 is arranged, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , a first driving device 335 , a locking member 5336 , a gear damper 338 and an unlocking cam member 5339 .

FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. FIG. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the rear side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the attitude detection member 343 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. is illustrated.

The back-side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruded tip, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17(b)). )reference). An insertion hole 311a, which is a substantially rectangular opening, is provided in the recessed portion. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 includes a main body member 13341 made of a metal material such as iron and shaped like an elongated bar with a U-shaped cross section, a gear damper receiving member 342, and a gear damper receiving member 342 coaxial with the gear damper receiving member 342. , an upper cover member 344, a lower cover member 345, an angle regulating rod member 346, and an oscillating member 360 disposed at the front end of the body member 341. Prepare the Lord.

81 is a front exploded perspective view of the body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345 and the swing member 360 of the lever member 13340. FIG.

A body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 includes a body portion 13341a formed in a long bar shape with a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at substantially the center of the body portion 13341a, and a regulating hole. A hole 341c, a pair of swinging member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e, a regulation hole 341f, and an eccentric cam member 5333 and a lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) which are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. and a contact member 13341g to be contacted.

The contact member 13341g contacts the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface, and contacts the lock member 5336 at the rear side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. FIG. The oscillating operation member 13310 includes a disk-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360, and a back-side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 disposed inside the rear side frame member 13311 and having a portion projecting from the inside to the outside, and a flange sandwiched between the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. A front cover 13313 and a rear cover 13314 which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the rear side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front and rear direction, It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

The posture correction device 13312 includes an abutment member 13312a projecting outward from a guide hole 13311b of the rear side frame member 13311, and a support member 13312b disposed between the abutment member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. and a hook member 13312c that protrudes inward from the hook insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and has a hook-shaped portion that fits with the locking protrusion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

The contact member 13312a includes a straight-rod-shaped projecting portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 projecting from the projecting portion 13312a1 in the left-right direction in a flange shape.

The protruding portion 13312a1 is a portion that protrudes outside the guide hole 13311b of the rear side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extension wall 13311c of the rear side frame member 13311 to extend the contact member 13312 further. This is the part that prevents it from sticking out.

The front cover 13313 is provided with a concave locking recess 13313a opened rearward below the fastening position with the rear cover 13314 (backward in FIG. 82).

The separation prevention cover 13315 has a receiving recess 13315a that is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 and configured to receive the protective cover 13316 in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). It is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured such that a rod that is drilled and inserted therein can be fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 83 shows the method of assembling the front cover 13313, rear cover 13314, separation prevention cover 13315 and protection cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83(a) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and rear cover 13314. 83(b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83(c) is the front cover 13313, the rear Fig. 13 is a cross-sectional view of cover 13314, separation prevention cover 13315 and protection cover 13316;

As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83(a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are fixed, and in FIG. 83(b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. is added, and FIG. 83(c) shows a state in which a protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the opposing wall portions with fastening screws N13a. As shown in FIG. 83(b), a separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83(b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is irremovably fixed.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a so as to cover the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right in FIG. 83(c)) so that it cannot be pulled out). , and the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) are fastened and fixed to the rear side frame member 13311 so that the upper side surface of the rear side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316. As shown in FIG.

With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions such as partially disassembling the operation device 13300 and passing wires through it.

That is, when the fastening screw N13a must be removed to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 13315. FIG.

Furthermore, in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, the fastening screw N13b must be removed. is abutted against the rear side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, it is necessary to remove the rear side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the rear frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13. 13322 are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side becomes narrow. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, thereby preventing fraud.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the rear side frame member 13311 will be described. 84(a) is a perspective view of the rear side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84(b) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. ), and FIG. 84(c) is a sectional view of the rear frame member 13311 taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84(b).

As shown in FIG. 84, the rear side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (FIG. 84(c) left-right direction) below the insertion hole 311a. ), a wall-shaped extended wall 13311c extending laterally outward beyond the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the rear-side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. and a hook insertion hole 13311e vertically drilled at the end of the guide bottom wall 13311d opposite to the guide hole 13311b. , and a pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b from the end of the extension wall 13311c.

As shown in FIG. 84(c), the hook insertion hole 13311e has a side surface on the side of the guide bottom wall 13311d that slopes away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. This inclination secures a contact area between the hook member 13312c and the inclined contact portion 13312c3, which will be described later, and can prevent the guide bottom wall 13311d from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

The support member guide wall 13311f is formed such that the upper end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 84(a)) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

Next, referring to FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c will be described. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, and FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85(b) is the direction of arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85(c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a), and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of the hook member 13312c taken along line LXXXVd-LXXXVd of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member configured in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. A hook portion 13312c2 provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall projecting outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in such a manner that a portion of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is the same as the inclination angle of the hook insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the rear side frame member 13311.

Next, referring to FIG. 86, the support member 13312b will be described. The support member 13312b is made of a hard resin and is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction when viewed from above. 86(b) is a top view of the support member 13312b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86(a), and FIG. 86(c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b taken along line LXXXVIc-LXXXVIc in FIG. 86(b). be.

As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, and a pair of plate-like abutment plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the body portion 13312b1. , and a locking projection 13312b3 projecting in the thickness direction from the end of the main body 13312b1, and a viewing hole 13312b4 vertically drilled at the intersection of the main body 13312b1.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in a region surrounded by the body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

When the body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peep hole 13312b4. can be prevented.

Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 and 88 show how the posture correcting device 13312 is attached to the back side frame member 13311 in chronological order.

87(a) is a partial top view of the rear side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87(a). 87(c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87(d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device taken along line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87(c). 87(e) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 taken along line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87(d).

88(a), 88(c) and 88(e) are partial top views of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88(b) is FIG. 88(a). 88(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88(c), and FIG. 88(f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88(e).

A method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correcting device 13312 is moved along the guide bottom wall 13311d to the rear side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b). ), the tip of the body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted through the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left of the support member 13312b, but since it is post-mounted, there is a space in the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b. The space on the left side) can be widened, and the insertion of the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b can be facilitated.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 87(e), the abutting member 13312a is attached to the rear side frame member 13311 in such a manner that the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (blocked) by the extended wall 13311c of the rear side frame member 13311. is placed inside the

In the states shown in FIGS. 87(c) to 87(e), the coil spring SP13 is contracted from its natural length. That is, a rightward load is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves leftward.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), the hook member 13312c is inserted into the hook insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 from the state shown in FIGS. 87(c) to 87(e). It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (lower side in FIG. 88(b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88(d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311. Therefore, if the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be assembled or if the hook member is damaged and falls off, the appearance of the These defects can be detected by inspection.

As shown in FIGS. 88(c) and 88(d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts against the lower surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d. 88(f), the support member 13312b is moved to the left by the hook member 13312c by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the leftward movement of the support member 13312b is caused by the hook member 13312c). is prevented), and the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted by covering the locking convex portion 13312b3 with the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c from above.

That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the rear frame member 13311 by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 as shown in FIGS. 88(e) and 88(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side frame member 13311 from the inside of the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 prevents the upward movement of the support member 13312b. In the case where the hook-like portion for blocking upward movement from the frame member 13311 is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-like portion. also need to be moved.

In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, and the function of the posture correction device 13312 may be hindered. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is important, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it is necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, to double the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 will increase accordingly (for example, double), and the force will be weak. Assembly is difficult for workers.

On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is different from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state, regardless of the distance the support member 13312b is moved when the hook member 13312c is assembled. by displacement. Therefore, by reducing the distance by which the support member 13312b is moved, it is possible to assemble with a smaller force and secure a large holding force. In this embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the movement dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

When removing the posture correcting device 13312, the front end of the support member 13312b (the left end in FIG. 88(f)) is moved in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, thereby disengaging the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b. The hook is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311 respectively.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88(f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) of the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311. It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and it is necessary to apply force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. This prevents the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back-side frame member 13311, or from illegally removing the support member 13312b or the hook member 13312c.

In addition, in order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88(f)), the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are in close contact with each other. need to let Therefore, it is necessary to strictly manage the dimensional relationship. (The back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88(f)) and the locking projection 13312b3 come into contact with each other, and the supporting member stops halfway.

In the present embodiment, by concentrating force on the concave portion 13312c5 provided in the hook member 13312c, the hook member 13312c is deformed with a relatively small force, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 becomes the locking projection. It can be pushed inside the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

In addition, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 until it is pressed against the wall on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of inserting the wire from the hook insertion hole 13311e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the function of posture correction device 13312 will be described. Figures 89(a) and 89(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 13300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 89(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. .

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (the linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363 and in which the vibrating device 366 is displaced) A case will be described where the player sets the operation direction U13a in which the player pushes the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction). Note that the smaller the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed without turning back).

By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89(a), the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates and rotates the lever member 13340 to the downward position shown in FIG. 89(b).

Here, as shown in FIG. 89(b), when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position and a straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position.

Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes an angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the projecting portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a abuts against the wall member 13322b, and the lever member 13340 is swung. The member 13310 is rotated by an angle θ13y clockwise in FIG. 89(a). The angle θ13y is set to the same angle as the angle at which the body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

By rotating the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340, the moving direction of the lens member 13317 is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the directions Y13a and Y13b is the angle θ13y). Therefore, in a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is made smaller). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in operational feeling and a situation in which it is difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317 .

In this embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310 . Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is arranged inside the lever member 13340 .

In addition, since the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. By doing so, it is possible to easily suggest the timing of pressing the lens member 317 to the player. That is, for example, by displaying a message such as "Press" on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with the timing when the swinging operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol is displayed. The display on the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340. 13340 is rotated counterclockwise (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89(b), a load is generated that rotates the swing operation member 13310 clockwise in FIG. 89(b)). Therefore, the force generated by the attitude correction device 13312 to change the attitude of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force to brake the lever member 13340 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating excessively and causing the rear end portion of the lever member 13340 (the right end portion in FIG. 89(b)) to collide with the inner case member 13330 .

The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut on the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 attempts to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotates from the state of FIG. 89(b)). are placed in a good position. As a result, even when the player applies an excessive load to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation axis of the lever member 13340 to the swinging operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and to rotate the swinging operation member 13310 by the meshing rotation of the gear group. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 contacts the wall member 13322b to change the attitude of the swing operation member 13310. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and 89(b), the elastic force (torsional displacement) of the torsion spring SP2 that biases the swing operation member 13310 is , is larger when placed in the downward position. At the downward position, a force is applied from the attitude correcting device 13312 to the swinging operation member 13310 in such a manner as to rotate the swinging operation member 13310 in the direction opposite to the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP2.

Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 to prevent relative displacement with respect to the lever member 13340 is greater when the swing operation member 13310 is positioned downward than when the swing operation member 13310 is positioned upward. will be larger in the state that is placed in Therefore, a state (upward position) that produces a feeling of operation with a small (light) rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 and a state (a downward position) that produces a feeling of operation with a large (heavy) rotational resistance. can be formed.

For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swinging operation member 13310 is placed in the upward position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak and the swinging operation member 13310 is pushed back by the reaction force of the torsion spring SP2. On the other hand, when the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swinging operation member 13310 can be operated to hit the lens member 13317. By increasing the rotation resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be hardened against the lever member 13340. For example, when the lens member 13317 is hit continuously, failure to hit can be suppressed. .

It should be noted that the change in the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in this embodiment is caused by the change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action does not change depending on the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a change in posture of the swing operation member 13310 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. Figures 90(a) and 90(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 13300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). 90(a) and 90(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, and in FIG. 90(a), the contact member 13312a is in contact with the wall member 13322b. 90(b), force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 has been pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted. , a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward.

As shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is constructed in a manner that allows it to contract. In addition, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated by the coil spring SP13 affects the displacement. Since it increases in proportion, it is possible to suppress excessive rotation of the swing operation member 13310 .

In this embodiment, since the pivot rod 363, which is the rotating shaft of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged in the directions Y13a and Y13b in which the lens member 13317 is pushed, the load pushing the lens member 13317 causes the swing operation member to move. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force that rotates the 13310 .

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is always changed when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position. It is possible to switch between a case where the swing operation member 14310 changes its posture and a case where it does not change its posture when the operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

91(a) is a front view of the locking member 14336 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 91(b) is a side view of the locking member 14336 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXXIb in FIG. 91(a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the locking member 14336 has a vertically elongated rod shape and includes a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a projecting portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. and a locking member 14336c that is configured to be movable in the retracting direction.

The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and has a biasing spring SP14a disposed between itself and the main body member 14336a. placed in a accessible position. The locking member 14336c has a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering the upper surface.

Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92(a)) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92(a)). 91(b)), and when contacting from a position other than the upper side (for example, from the front side (from the left side in FIG. 91(b))), the locking member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c. .

The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a). FIG. 92(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 14300 taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a cylindrical portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92(a)), and an umbrella portion. 5333f and .

The cam portion 14333c has a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. and a projecting portion 14333c2 projecting from the end of 14333c1.

The projecting portion 14333 c 2 has a circumferential side surface that is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 . Therefore, when the projecting portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force that presses the projecting portion 14337b1 is not only the circumferential force of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension part 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The attitude of the main body member 14337a is maintained at the intermediate position by applying elastic force to the main body member 14337a and the end of the main body member 14337a. and an elastic device 14337d for

The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end opposite to the end supported by the shaft support 14337c can protrude from the inner case member 14330 . In the state shown in FIG. 92(a), the body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (a positional relationship in which the body member 14337a touches at a distance of 0) in which even if it contacts the swing operation member 14310, it cannot apply a load.

The extending portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 92(a)), and is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft supporting portion 14337c so as to be able to abut on the projecting portion 14333c2. 92(a) is provided with a projecting portion 14337b1 projecting toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 92(a). Here, the protruding portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the protruding portion 14333c2 in the state shown in FIG. 95(b)), it is disposed at a position outside the movement locus of the projecting portion 14333c2.

The elastic device 14337d has a case fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion that abuts on the main body member 14337a is recessed in a doglegged shape. Configured. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, it can be returned to its position by being converged in the dogleg-shaped recessed portion when the rotational force is removed.

FIG. 92(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 14300 taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 92(b), the driving gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92(a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise, thereby rotating the lock member 14336. , a state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the upward position. 92(a) to 92(b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted and the guide hole drilled for the posture correcting device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to protrude as compared with the thirteenth embodiment. A rear side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that 13311b is closed is disposed on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310 .

Figures 93(a) and 93(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 14300 along a line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a). Note that FIG. 93(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92(b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged at the downward position. 93(a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state of FIG. 93(b), the state of FIG. 92(a) is restored.

That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. Move while maintaining your posture.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94(a) to 94(c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. Note that FIG. 94(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is moved closer to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 than the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in FIG. 94(b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state immediately after the contact between the projecting portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 is released.

As shown in FIG. 94, in this embodiment, compared with the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the projection 14333c2 and the projection 14337b1 are rotated in a state where the rotation angle of the extension 14337b is small. can be released from contact with

That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extended portion 14337b continues to rotate until the projecting portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the projecting portion 14337b1 can escape between the projecting portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94(b)). 94(b) to the state shown in FIG. 94(b), the contact between the protruding portions 14333c2 and 14337b1 can be released (see FIG. 94(c)). Therefore, the area where the extended portion 14337b resists the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

95 and 96, FIGS. 95(a), 95(b), 96(a) and 96(b) show the 14300 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. FIG. In FIG. 95(a), the swinging operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position, and the projecting portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the projecting portion 14337b1 of the posture switching device (see FIG. 95(a)). 92(a)), and in FIG. 95(b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 96(a) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95(b). 96(b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96(a).

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the posture switching device 14337 (FIG. 95(b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. can be done.

95(b), when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. As shown in FIG. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337 and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship such that they do not come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, although the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the driving force from being transmitted at the same time. can be done.

Since the upper side surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 (the side surface in contact with the projecting portion 14337b1) is inclined with respect to the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the projecting portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 The force that presses the projecting portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load caused by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). can be made Therefore, the load in the rotational direction on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96(b), the state shown in FIG. 95(a) is restored. At this time, since the unlocking cam member 5339 abuts against the locking member 14336 from above, the engaging member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the locking member 14336 is retracted, and the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is prevented. Being disturbed is prevented.

As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the attitude of the swing operation member 14310 is changed in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 at a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be looser than when a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310 (there is a slight idling). However, it can be made to cause no change in appearance).

Here, the time from the state shown in FIG. 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. 95(b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 is 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. 92(b) at the same timing after driving the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79), Either change from the state to the state of FIG. 95(b) can occur.

For example, the time from the state of FIG. 95(a) to the state of FIG. 95(b) is longer than the time from the state of FIG. 92(a) to the state of FIG. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95(a) to the state shown in FIG. ) to the state of FIG. 92(b), it is impossible to determine what action the swinging operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swinging operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, whether the change from the state shown in FIG. 92(a) to the state shown in FIG. It may be impossible to determine whether a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95(b) occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 mesh with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by separate drive gears. In this case as well, the time from when one of the drive motors is operated until the swinging operation member 14310 starts to swing with respect to the lever member 13340 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 92(a)) and the lever A similar effect can be obtained by adjusting the time until the member 13340 starts rotating clockwise in FIG. 92(a).

In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor that takes longer time is rotated first, and the second drive motor that takes shorter time is rotated later, and then the motor is rotated first. By stopping the driven first driving motor (the player can still feel the vibration of the second driving motor during this period), the player can feel the vibration of the first driving motor, which lasts a long time, while the second driving motor is stopped. 2 driving motors can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97(a) to 97(c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. Note that FIG. 97(a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 begin to abut, and FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of a) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in FIG. A state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of (b) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 97, the upper side surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is inclined away from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d as it approaches the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface. The displacement caused by the movement moves the protruding portion 14337b1 in the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component of the load in the axial radial direction becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 has resistance in the circumferential direction.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 97(c), the load applied from the projecting portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a is driven. Even when the power is turned off, the load from the projecting portion 14337b can be resisted. Therefore, power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described. It is possible to construct a state in which it is pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

98(a) and 98(b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98(c) is a rear side frame at the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line in FIG. 98(d) is a cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312 taken along line LXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId in FIG. 98(c).

FIG. 98(a) shows a state (locked state) in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the projecting member 13312a1, and FIG. state) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b), the abutment member 15312a includes a bar-shaped projecting member 15312a1 whose end is deformable, and a projecting member 15312a1 having a T-shaped cross section. and a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the flange member 15312a2.

The projecting member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformation portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the body portion 15312a11 in the width direction. Prepare. A connecting portion between the body portion 15312a11 and the deformation portion 15312a12 is cut so as to be easily deformed. Fits inside the width in the short direction of 15312a11.

The flange member 15312a2 has a base portion 15312a21 formed with a dimension that fits between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f, and the distance between the connecting portions of the main body portion 15312a11 and the deformation portion 15312a12 of the member 15312a1 extending from the base portion 15312a21. A projecting portion 15312a22 projecting with a short width is mainly provided.

With such a configuration, when the projecting portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98(a)) in which it projects outward. When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the projecting member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98(b)) in which the deformation portion 15312a12 is tapered inward.

98(c) and 98(d) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is attached to the back side outer frame member 13311. FIG. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is made shorter than its natural length, it is possible to generate a load from the coil spring SP13 to embed the flange member 15312a2 into the projecting member 15312a1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98(d), the abutment member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformation portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and the illegal pulling out of the overhanging member 15312a1.

99(a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture corrector 15312 along the line corresponding to line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 taken along line LXXXIXb.

99(a) and 99(b) show a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the rear side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid into the space occupied by the hook member 13312c. .

In the state shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), since the coil spring SP13 is longer than its natural length, no force is generated to press the flange member 15312a2 against the projecting member 15312a1, and the deformed portion 15312a12 loses its shape. By returning (returning to the state of FIG. 98(b)), the contact member 15312a is pulled out. As a result, the projecting member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 (the right side in FIG. 99(b)).

That is, the projecting member 15312a1 can be replaced only by laterally sliding the support member 13312b without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. FIG. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it is a portion that is likely to be damaged due to collision with other members. A certain projecting member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the support member 13312b is moved by dropping the hook member 13312c. When a large load is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c so as to cause the hook member 13312c to break and fall off, the contact member 15312a can be prevented from being similarly damaged.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the abutment member 15312a can be pulled out, so that replacement can be performed quickly. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times, which is weighted in consideration of safety, and the hook member 13312c falls off. Thus, it is possible to determine when to replace the abutment member 15312a with the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. In addition, when the hook member 13312c is removed, the projecting member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that replacement can be easily performed and maintenance performance can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 100, the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Although the case where the operational feel of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, the operation device 16300 according to the sixteenth embodiment additionally changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310, thereby changing the operation of the swing operation member 16310. It is possible to change the feeling. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 100(a) to 100(d) are side views of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 100(a) to 100(d) show an external view of the swing operation member 16310, a schematic cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340, and a schematic representation of other parts. Illustrated by lines.

FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the upward position, and FIGS. 100(c) and 100(d) show the swing operation member 16310 facing downward. It is shown in position. 100(a) and 100(c) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward roll side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100(a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. 100(b) and 100(d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the end of movement on the backward roll side (clockwise direction in FIG. 100(a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the rear side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the rear cover 13314, and the fastening portions of the front cover 13313 and the rear cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 (see Fig. 82) and a lens member 13317.

The separation prevention cover 16315 is attached to the wall surface of the rear side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 100(a)) from the bottom end of the disk portion, and the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82). an extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d disposed in a long groove shape on the side surface of the extension portion 16315c facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313, and the inside of the long groove 16315d and an iron ball 16315e movably arranged.

The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e disposed therein by gravity. distance is shortened.

Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the end on the forward roll side to the end on the backward roll side is 10 degrees (θ13y=10 degrees), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100(a) to be less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (right and left direction in FIG. 100(a)) (θ16a<24 degrees), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 16310 (the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d can be maintained) can be done). In addition, in this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

The iron ball 16315e is an iron spherical member that can bear most of the weight of the swing operation member 16310 . Therefore, by moving the iron ball 16315e, the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 changes.

As shown in FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b), when the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is positioned at the pivot rod 363. 100(c) and 100(d), when the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is placed at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity The position is made far from the pivot rod 363 .

That is, the distance from the pivot rod 363 to the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is placed at the downward position, the center of gravity position is farther from the pivot rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is placed at the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310 is increased. (Fig. 100(c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

Therefore, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100(c) and 100(d)), the player pushes the lens member 13317 to move the swing operation member 16310 forward. After rotating in the direction of rotation (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100(d) to the state of FIG. 100(c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated by the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100(c) ) from the state of FIG. can be made).

As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 against the lever member 13340 is equal to that of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. , and when the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position, it is possible to increase the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(c)). . In this case, the time from when the player hits the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 enters the state shown in FIG. 100(c) until it returns to the state shown in FIG. 100(c), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 can be maintained even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (in case of repeated hits), and the state of FIG. 100(c) can be immediately changed. As compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG.

In addition, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100(a). Since the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is rotated is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced compared to the case of counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 100(a).

On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. Rotational resistance can be reduced compared to the clockwise rotation in FIG. 100(c).

Therefore, the direction in which the rotation resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is placed in the upward position. can be reversed.

According to this embodiment, the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to a change in the state inside the swing operation member 16310) changes the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced compared to the case where the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a directional load.

Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feel of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to changes in the amount of twist of the torsion spring SP2 has been described. and the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 101(a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 101(b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. . 101(a) and 101(b) show a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and the swinging operation member is attached to the lever member 13340, respectively. A state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward roll side is illustrated.

In this embodiment, an oscillating member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the oscillating member 360 in the first embodiment. The oscillating member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed so as to rub against the wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (see Figure 81).

The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

Also, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, a wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b has an extension 17322b1 extending upward from its upper end.

As shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b), the extended portion 17322b1 does not contact the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the friction arm 17362c is formed in a manner of contact. That is, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the extended portion 17322b1 has a contact surface that is pressed against the distal end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. It is formed in an arc shape with 363 as the center. As a result, it is possible to secure a contact area between the extended portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c, thereby exerting a sufficient dynamic frictional force. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 is increased by the dynamic frictional force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 is also increased.

Since the change in the operational feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340 , the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340 . Therefore, regardless of whether the swing operation member 13310 is operated by swinging it at high speed or when the swing operation member 13310 is operated slowly, once the tip of the lever member 13310 is placed in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 will not move. Since the same dynamic friction force can be applied to the rotation of , it is possible to reliably produce a change in operational feeling.

In addition, since the dynamic frictional force changes depending on the pressing force and does not change depending on the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm 17362c is pressed against the extension 17322b1. Sufficient dynamic frictional force can be generated even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, at the beginning of rotation).

In this embodiment, since the extension part 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, the members that need to be replaced when the extension part 17322b1 is damaged can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. can. Therefore, replacement of the wall member 17322b can be facilitated, and maintainability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 102, an eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described. is transmitted to the swing member 18360, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 102(a) to 102(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 102(a) to 102(c) illustrate a state in which the swinging operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the illustration of the torsion spring SP2 is omitted, and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) is shown. ) is removed. Also, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated forward with respect to the lever member 18340 is illustrated.

The operating device 18300 in this embodiment includes a swinging member 18360 that is disposed inside the swinging operating member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swinging operating member 13310, and a lever member 18340 that pivotally supports the swinging member 18360. , at least as portions different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The swing member 18360 includes a body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a buffer member 364. , a regulating rod 365 and a vibration device 366 (see FIG. 81).

The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102(a)). A rubber band RB capable of producing a load in the pressing direction is wrapped around the thin wall portion 18362c.

The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member made of a rubber material, and both ends are immovably fixed with pins around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when rotating the swing operation member 13310, sliding friction is generated between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

The lever member 18340 includes a body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by contact with an eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The main body member 18341 sandwiches a long hole 18341h extending obliquely with respect to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and the extending direction of the long hole 18341h in the side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a having a U-shaped cross section. and a pair of guide walls 18341i arranged in parallel in a manner. The long hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB, as shown in FIG. 102(a).

The transmission device 18347 has a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion inserted through the long hole 18341h and having a size capable of sliding between the guide walls 18341i, and is pivotally supported by the lower end of the push-in portion 18347a. and an overhanging portion 18347c that overhangs from the lower end of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in this embodiment). In this embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102(a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the projecting portion 18347c) by a biasing spring (not shown) against the pushing portion 18347a.

In this embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide 18241b are arranged in a positional relationship in which the adjustment portion 18347b collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. A wall portion 18341i is provided.

By extending the projecting portion 18347c beyond the pivotal support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction approaching the projecting portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easily rotated with respect to the pushing portion 18347a and a direction in which it is difficult to rotate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102(a) from the state of FIG. The portion 18347a does not move along the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102(b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102(a) from the state of FIG. 18341h, the driving force is used to move the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102(c)). In this case, the push-in portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, so that the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are brought into closer contact with each other, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. . Accordingly, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 appears to be in the downward position, the direction of rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to operate or stop the transmission device 18347. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 103, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case where the load generated by the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described. Lever member 19340 can also be affected. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). 103(a) and 103(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position, and in FIG. 103(a), the swing operation member 13310 is A state in which no force is applied is illustrated, and in FIG. 103(b), a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 by the player and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103(b)). illustrated.

The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that only the engagement protrusion 19345e is provided projecting from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment. The locking projection 19345e is arranged at a position on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in this embodiment, instead of the inner case member 13330, an inner case member 19330 is arranged. The inner case member 19330 is constructed in such a manner that a transmission device 19337 is added inside the inner case member 13330 .

The transmission device 19337 includes a rotating lever 19337b which is supported by a rotating shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and has an L-shaped cross section, and a rotating lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 which rotates in the direction of rotation (Fig. 103(a)). ) and a torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force in the counterclockwise direction.

When the rotating lever 19337b is positioned at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103(a)), the rotating lever 19337b has a posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that contacts the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331, and a posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 is bent and the rotating lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the biasing direction, the tip portion contacts the contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 of the left front cover 13321 and the surface position. and a contact portion 19337b2 disposed in the . In this embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and an opening is also formed in the inner case member 19330, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are connected inside the opening. and can be brought into contact with each other.

With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340 . Details are given below.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), when the swing operation member 13310 is placed in the downward position without the player applying a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). ), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (resulting in the state of FIG. 103(a)). In this state, the rotating lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and no load is transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotating lever 19337b can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), when the player performs an operation to rotate the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. , the abutment member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. As shown in FIG. In this case, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking protrusion 19345e in the rotating direction, the lever member 19340 is caused to react in the rotating direction through the rotating lever 19337b (clockwise rotation in FIG. 103(b)). ) can be suppressed.

Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction in which the lever member 19340 is raised by the recoil, and the rear end of the lever member 19340 is pushed downward. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12(b)). load can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 increases and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. (See FIG. 77), the rotating lever 19337b can contact the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied. Rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be kept low.

As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, the rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased when an overload is applied, thereby allowing the locking member 5336 (see FIG. 89(b)) to operate. The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correcting device 13312 that rotates the swing operation member 13310 in the direction in which the swing operation member 13310 is raised has been explained. It is configured as a device that operates automatically. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 104(a) and 104(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in Figure 17(a), and Figure 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of Figure 104 ( Fig. 10 is a rear view of the swing operation member 20310 as viewed in the direction of arrow CV in a).

104(a) and 104(b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position, and in FIG. 104(a), the swing operation member 13310 is A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction with no force applied is illustrated. b) A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise is illustrated.

The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on a cup-shaped rear side frame member 20311 (outside shape similar to the rear side frame member 13311) arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366, and on the rear side frame member 20311. A posture correction device 20312, a front cover 13313, a rear cover 13314, a separation prevention cover 13315, a protection cover 13316, and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

The back-side frame member 20311 has a functional wall portion 20311c as a partition that divides the back opening into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

The functional wall portion 20311c has a concave portion 20311c1 which is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the axial rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correcting device 20312 so as to be able to support the axial rod portion 20312a1; Above the recessed portion 20311c1, the recessed portion 20311c2 to be inserted has a fan-shaped cross section (the width becomes wider as it becomes deeper from the entrance), and from the recessed portion 20311c1 of the recessed portion 20311c2 to be inserted. and a locking projection 20311c3 projecting from the inner side surface on the far side.

The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the body member 20312a so as to pass through an opening 20312a3 of the body member 20312a. Prepare for.

The body member 20312a includes a shaft portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape with the shaft portion 20312a1 arranged at the end, the shaft portion 20312a1 and the flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a clamp recessed at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4 so as to clamp the leaf spring member 20312b. It mainly includes a concave portion 20312a5.

The side surface of the insertion recess 20311c2 farther from the recess 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall in which the recess 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical interval between them is larger than the thickness of the plate spring member 20312b. is also slightly larger.

The plate spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3. The upper part 20312b1 that holds down the shaft part 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end of the upper part 20312b1 (located at the upper end of the opening 20312a3) are bent and the opening 20312a3 faces inward. It is mainly provided with a lower part 20312b2 extending in a manner penetrating through and inserted into the clamping recess 20312a5, and a locking hole 20312b3 drilled in the upper part 20312b1. In this embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction to moderate the bending (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104(a) rotates and rubs counterclockwise).

The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking projection 20311c3 is hooked when the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is subjected to an outward load (toward the right in FIG. 104(a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling out of the insertion recess 20311c2. .

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b can prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the concave portion 20311c1. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction of dropping off, it is necessary to move the plate spring member 20312b together. Since it is in the direction of biting into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the axial rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a from dropping out of the concave portion 20311c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104(b), when the body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the rear side frame member 20311, the plate spring member 20312b is pushed in the direction in which the biasing force of the plate spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the axial rod portion 20312a1 from the concave portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correcting device 2031 during the game, even though the configuration does not use fastening members such as screws.

Here, if an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end of the operation area hole 20311b, The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to the position where the bending is canceled. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed outside the rear side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by visual inspection.

As a method for assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 while the plate spring member 20312b is inserted through the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring member 20312b is not yet inserted into the holding concave portion 20312a5.

Next, the upper part 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b, which is freely movable inside the opening 20312a3, is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104(a) can be formed by pulling the lower part 20312b2 of the plate spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the plate spring member 20312b rotates inside the insertion recess 20311c2 in a direction approaching the locking protrusion 20311c3 with the side surface where the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum. 20312b3 is hooked on locking protrusion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper part 20312b1 from falling out of the insertion recess 20311c2.

In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it is easy to assemble and remove (the lower part 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is not in the assembled state. If the plate spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of 20311, removal becomes difficult.

Therefore, when removing the back side frame member 20311 and removing the posture correcting device 20312 from the inside like maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture can be corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Tampering, such as removing the device 20312, can be made difficult.

Next, referring to FIG. 106, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described. consists of In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment taken along line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17(a). Note that FIG. 106(a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and FIG. 106(b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position. . 106(a) and 106(b) illustrate a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 106(a), the lever member 13340 On the other hand, FIG. 106B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side, and a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. be.

As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (diagonally to the upper left in FIG. 106(a)) and disposed inside the pair of friction arms 17362c.

The extension slide portion 21322b2 is provided with a long hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the up-down direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position through which the projecting pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. , the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases as it goes downward, and is formed in such a manner that the projecting pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted therethrough in the state shown in FIG. 106(b).

The oscillating member 21360 includes a body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, a regulating rod 365, a vibration device 366, (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a projecting pin 21362d projecting inwardly from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

In this embodiment, since the protruding pin 21362d is inserted through the long hole 21322b21, the shape of the long hole 21322b21 changes the movement of the swing operation member 13310 relative to the lever member 13340 as the lever member 13340 rotates. be able to. For example, by forming the long hole 21322b21 into a shape equivalent to a circular arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1, the swing operation member 13310 moves relative to the lever member 13340. Displacement can be nullified.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated in order to compensate for the displacement of the fitting position between the setting pin 21362d and the long hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in a rotatable direction, i.e., from the state shown in FIG. 106(a) to the state shown in FIG. , FIG. 106(a) clockwise), the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. Thereby, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, a twenty-second embodiment will be described. In the twenty-first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is changed by guiding the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove 21322b21. The attitude change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the meshing rotation of the gears. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 107(a) and 107(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of Figure 17(a).

FIG. 107(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, and FIG. 107(b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position. 107(a) and 107(b) illustrate a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 107(a), the lever member 22340 is On the other hand, FIG. 107B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated to the forward roll side, and a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated to the backward roll side with respect to the lever member 22340, respectively. be. Also, in FIGS. 107(a) and 107(b), the illustration of the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 pivotally supported by a lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting a swing operation member 13310 at one end (the left side in FIG. 107(b)), A wall member 22322b having an arcuate wall portion 22322b2 that is constantly meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swinging member 22360 that has a mesh plate portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Prepare the Lord.

The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 pivotally supported by the angle regulating rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and includes an inwardly extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inwardly extending portion thereof. An arcuate wall portion 22322b2 extending from the inner (right in FIG. 107(a)) end of 22322b1 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and having gear teeth meshing with the rotary gear 22347 And prepare.

The oscillating member 22360 is a motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the oscillating member 360 in the thirteenth embodiment, which has a toothed plate portion 22362c formed with gear teeth that mesh with the rotary gear 22347. 22362 and configured in a swapped manner.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, when the lever member 22340 is rotated, the rotary gear 22347 is rotated with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is axially supported as the rotary gear 22347 rotates. It is rotated around the rod 363 . Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

Note that in this embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107(a) to the state shown in FIG. 107(b), during which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees. That is, the gear ratio of the interlocking plate portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the circular arc wall portion 22322b2 is approximately 0.3 (=10/34).

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted and the swinging operation member 310 is configured to be housed in the rear side, so that the swinging operation member 310 is arranged at the downward position and protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 to store the packing box. When protruding from the box, the front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in the packing box.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, a resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact), Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 abut against each other has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rocking motion of the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted by the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position spaced upward from the eccentric cam member 4333 .

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in one direction. By moving the swing operation member 310 upward and downward, a swing operation can be performed.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can reciprocate up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the tilting operation can be performed. Furthermore, even if the player erroneously lifts the swinging operation member 310 upward during the fanning motion, the lock member 4336 can restrict the swinging of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 Damage can be prevented.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the locking member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to restrict the rocking motion of the lever member 340. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is provided from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is stretched when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated, You may make it enter below the rear-end part of the lever member 340. As shown in FIG.

In this case, it is not necessary to shape the hook-shaped distal end portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that enters the lower side of the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side while the lever member 340 is in the intermediate posture of the swinging angle range has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the swingable range of the lever member 340 is limited above the peeling member 350 whose swinging is restricted. (The lever member 340 cannot be moved enough to apply momentum). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330 .

Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position of the swing angle range. In this case, since the distance between the rear end of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased when the lever member 340 is in a position in which the swing is restricted, the lever member 340 is pulled off the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player, and the player feels the swinging operation member 310 heavy), and the player feels the swinging operation member. It allows time to relax the load on 310 .

On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position of the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that the peeling member 350 exerts a load on the eccentric cam member 333 . may occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, only when the lock member 8336 is arranged closer to the center position than the middle position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not come into contact with the peeling member 350), the lock member 8336 is on the fixed side. may be placed in the

In the ninth embodiment, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length, and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 may each have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic coupling member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic coupling member CS92.

In this case, when the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easier for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is made of hard resin has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hook member 13312c may be made of a shape-memory material that maintains its shape at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the hook member 13312c is disengaged from the support member 13312b by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is made of hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by changing the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed while the rear side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface condition of the extended portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface condition of the extended portion 17322b1 may be formed with a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a smaller friction coefficient than the first region. In this case, the friction arm 17362c gives the first feeling (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who operates the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm 17362c and the extended portion 17322b1 are rubbing each other. It can be changed depending on whether the friction arm 17362c rubs against the second region or when the friction arm 17362c rubs against the second region.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (while the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, by operating the rotating lever 19337b in a direction opposite to the rotating direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing it into contact with the lever member 19340, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be obtained.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<An example of the technical concept of a structure in which the lever member 340 folds when locked>
A gaming machine comprising a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a restricting member that restricts the movement of the moving member, wherein the moving member is an operating member to be operated; and a member to be regulated connected to the operating member and whose movement is restricted by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's manual operation is regulated at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example, See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if a player applies an excessive load to the moving member while movement is restricted, the load is applied to the restricting member through the moving member, and the restricting member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member and whose movement can be regulated by the regulating member. When the movement of the member is restricted by the restricting member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so the load is consumed to deform the shape of the moving member. By doing so, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged due to the player applying an excessive load to the moving member.

As for the configuration of the moving member that realizes deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the application of a load, for example, a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is provided in a part of the moving member, or a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. A configuration in which each part is attracted by magnetic force is exemplified.

In a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player may apply an excessive load to the operating member. The higher the pressure, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more overload is applied to the operating member by the player, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member is activated only when a load greater than the attractive force is applied. shape is deformed. As a result, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body when it is normally operated with a load equal to or less than the attraction force, and the moving member can be easily operated.

In the game machine A1, the moving member moves a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the movement of the regulated member is regulated by the regulating member. and a non-transmission state in which at least the operating member is allowed to move relative to the regulated member by applying a load of .

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the moving member can be operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the movement of the regulated member is regulated by the regulating member. By applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the member, it is possible to construct a non-transmission state in which at least the operation member is allowed to move relative to the member to be regulated. In the non-transmission state, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member while ensuring the performance.

In game machines A1 and A2, a supporting member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft provided in the supporting member. , the game machine A3, wherein the movement of the moving member is swinging about the first axis.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and A2, by operating the operating member, it is possible to suppress the application of a large load between the regulating member and the member to be regulated. Damage to the regulating member can be suppressed.

A game machine A4 in the gaming machine A3, further comprising a first biasing member for generating a biasing force for moving the moving member in a swinging direction, the biasing force being applied to the operation member side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the biasing force of the first biasing member is applied to the operating member side and not to the restricted member side, so that the biasing member is applied to the restricting member. It is possible to prevent the urging force from being applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by receiving an excessive biasing force from the first biasing member when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state.

Here, as a case where an excessive biasing force is generated, a spring member is arranged in a manner to connect between the operating member and the member to be regulated, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but the operating member in the non-transmission state. A case is exemplified in which the spring member between the and the member to be regulated is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the member to be regulated increases, and there is a risk that the member to be regulated will exert an excessive force on the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is arranged with the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction, the biasing force of the first biasing member is generated in the direction of tilting the operation member forward, and the fixed state is achieved. The non-transmitting state is constituted by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the moving member of is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

Here, if the biasing direction of the first biasing member is set in the direction in which the moving member rises, when the player applies an overload downward to the operating member, the operating member is separated from the member to be regulated and is regulated. Even if the members can be prevented from being damaged, the operation member rises as soon as the player releases it, so there is a risk that the player will not notice that the overload is being applied and the operation member will be repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the direction of biasing the operating member by the first biasing member is directed in the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, so that the operating member is moved downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly applying an overload to the operating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is arranged with the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the biasing force of the first biasing member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement of the fixed state is achieved. The game machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmitting state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state in which the swinging of the member is regulated by the regulating member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the non-transmission state is configured by directing the operation member in the upward direction and applying a downward load to the operation member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to constitute the non-transmitting state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side due to the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operation members can be stabilized, making it easier for the player to perform the next operation.

A game machine A7 comprising a game machine A6 comprising braking means for reducing a swinging speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmitting state to the fixed state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the swinging speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmitting state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. , it is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper arranged on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and the gear portion arranged on the operation member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, since the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance, the greater the swing speed of the operation member, the greater the resistance applied to the operation member. . Therefore, resistance is suppressed when the swing speed is low (return speed of the operation member is low). The resistance can be large.

As a result, the biasing force of the first biasing member can be set smaller than when a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the first biasing member can be designed freely. degree can be improved.

A gaming machine A9 in the gaming machine A8, characterized in that the gear damper is arranged in such a manner as to generate viscous resistance in the relative movement of the operating member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the member to be regulated are fixed and rocked together, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the member to be regulated does not change, so the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmitting state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is applied to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operating member only when the player applies such a load to the operating member that the regulated member and the operating member are in a non-transmissive state. As a result, it is possible to change the sense of operation when the player operates the operation member, and encourage the player to use the operation member appropriately.

For example, if the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation member, which causes stress. If the operating member and the member to be regulated are returned to a fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, making it easier for the player to operate.

Therefore, the more the player tries to avoid stress, the more he avoids applying an overload to the operating member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the moving member from being destroyed.

In any one of game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member, the moving member receiving a load and A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when the fixed state is changed to the non-transmission state.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. , the transmission member can be prevented from being damaged, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member includes the position on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the moving member receives the load, and the position in which the moving member moves in the direction in which the moving member receives the load. In some cases, a position in the direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state and driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, even if a driving force is generated from the driving device when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, the driving force generated at that time is not affected by the operating member. is used for swinging of the regulated member and not used for swinging of the member to be regulated, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position in comparison with the case in which the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. projecting outward, and when the moving member is placed at the second position, the movement of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member, and the operating member and the restricted member are attracted by an electromagnet. A game machine A12 characterized in that the fixed state is constituted by the game machine A12.

Here, since the width of the outward protrusion of the operating member is smaller when the swinging of the operating member is restricted at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing a game machine, the operating member at the first position The size of the box can be reduced by selecting the fixed state as a reference.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swinging of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the game machine cannot be placed in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed at the first position in the factory inspection line, etc., the operation member may be mistakenly placed at the second position and the swinging may be fixed. There is a problem that the operation member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement of the moving member is restricted at the second position where the operation member projects, the operation member and the restricted member Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member can be released by turning off the power. As a result, the operation member can be easily arranged at the first position, and the game machine can be easily accommodated in the packing box or inspected on the improved inspection line.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. and a transmission member that transmits to the transmission member, wherein the movement member is moved in a direction away from the transmission member by operating the movement member in one direction. Machine B1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation is driven by the meshing of gears (for example, JP-A-2014-2014). -144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear increases, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member decreases, and the moving member is displaced by driving. There is a problem that there is a risk of imposing a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member to one side, the moving member moves away from the transmitting member, so that the moving member applies a load to the driving device and the transmitting member. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the moving member from imposing a load on the player due to the drive. Examples of transmission members include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

A game machine B2 in the game machine B1, characterized in that said transmission member comprises a member eccentrically supported on a first shaft and rotated around said first shaft.

Here, since the moving member and the transmission member are separated by operating the moving member in one direction, the moving member collides with the transmitting member when the moving member is operated in the other direction. In many cases, the larger the movement width of the moving member, the longer the arm length of the transmission member. In this case, the collision may damage the transmission member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, it is possible to drive the moving member at a portion where the distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is long. While ensuring the amount of movement, when colliding with the moving member, the portion with a short distance from the first axis to the outer shape is oriented toward the moving member, so that the moving member and the transmission member collide from the first axis. It is possible to shorten the length of the arm of the transmission member in the portion where the transmission is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The game machine B2 is characterized by comprising a first biasing member that generates a biasing force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, the specific direction being a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member approach each other. Gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the biasing force of the first biasing member presses the moving member against the transmission member. The member can be caused to reciprocate. As a result, the player's attention can be easily focused on the moving member.

In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second shaft that is different from the first shaft and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A game machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft and below the moving member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the second shaft extends in the left-right direction, and in a state in which the lever can swing in the forward tilting direction, the transmission member is positioned below the moving member. Since it is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operation member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in the game machine B4, an effect member for effecting an effect for the player is arranged in the operation member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the operation member is provided with an effect member for performing an effect for the player, so that the operation member can attract the player's attention.

Examples of the effect device for effecting the effect for the player include a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on a base, a vibrating device for generating vibration, and the like.

In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that vibrates, and the load applied to the operating member by vibrating the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by:

Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that at least vibrates, and the load applied to the operation member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is applied to the moving member. is directed away from the transmission member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member due to the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

In the game machine B6, the operating member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow interior, the vibrating device is disposed substantially in the center of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrating by the vibrating device is provided outside the operating member. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the operating member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibrating device is disposed substantially in the center of the operating member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. In addition, since the vibrating part that vibrates by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, the fingers of the player operating the operating member can directly vibrate. I can tell you. Therefore, the performance effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member capable of performing a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is aligned with the first axis across the second axis. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being arranged on the opposite side.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is set in the second direction. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first shaft across the shaft, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load is applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. can be reduced.

A game machine B9 characterized in that a game machine B8 comprises a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed, and a pushing disabled state in which the pushing member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the push-in enabled state in which the push-in member can be pushed in, and the push-in impossible state in which the push-in member is fixed so as not to be displaceable and cannot be pushed in, are formed. The game machine side can switch the influence of the operation performed by the player on the moving member.

For example, when the player intermittently and repeatedly pushes (hit) the pushing member, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the reaction causes the moving member to receive a load in the direction of approaching the transmission member. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in disabled state is established, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the moving member also moves away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the push-in member, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from colliding with the moving member due to the upward return of the operating member due to the biasing force.

As a method of constructing the push-incapable state, there is a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw, or a method of extending the push-in member to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that performs linear reciprocating motion. A method (continuous application of load in one direction) and the like are exemplified. According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the end position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device produces both actions of vibrating the pushing member and making the pushing member unable to be pushed. can be made

In any one of game machines B4 to B9, the first shaft and the second shaft are arranged in parallel, and the direction of rotation of the transmission member is the side on which the second shaft is interposed and separated from the first shaft. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that the direction faces the moving member.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves in opposition to the moving member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction approaching the moving member, it is possible to reduce the possibility of damage to the transmission member.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member includes a rotary gear that is supported by a first shaft and receives driving force from the driving device, and a rotary gear that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft and is supported by the moving member. and an eccentric cam abutted against a member, comprising a fixed state in which the rotating gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmitting state in which the rotating gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam. A gaming machine B11 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the rotation of the transmission member can swing the moving member, and the eccentric cam can move from the moving member to the threshold value or more. When a load is applied, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be relieved by putting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmitting state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The non-transmitting state between the eccentric cam and the rotating gear may be, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are connected in the circumferential direction. A case where they are fitted by friction is exemplified.

<An example of a technical concept in which a lock member for fixing a moving member is synchronized with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates driving force for driving the moving member, and a first shaft that is eccentrically supported on the first shaft. A gaming machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member; A standby state in which regulation is possible and a release state in which regulation of swinging of the moving member is released can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulation member are synchronously operated by the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is moved between a first position and a second position by a player's operation is swung by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device. By receiving a biasing force that moves the moving member in a direction approaching the eccentric cam-like transmission member, the moving member is restricted from swinging during the swinging motion of the moving member, and at a predetermined timing, the swinging motion of the moving member is restricted. There is a gaming machine that has a restricting member for releasing (for example, see JP-A-2013-244108). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the short diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side contacting the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swinging movement of the moving member. Although it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the attitude of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed, and the eccentric There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the major diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member for regulating the rocking movement of the moving member operate synchronously by the driving force of the driving device. It is possible to mechanically determine the posture of the transmission member when is released. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member directed toward the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the regulating member operates synchronously with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the regulation of swinging of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulating member The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the members are in the standby state, and when the moving member moves to a predetermined position, swinging of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member after the restricting member releases the restriction on the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to movement of the restricting member together with the rotating transmission member.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the movement of the moving member can be restricted by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous driving with the member (releasing the rocking restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

In the gaming machine C2, when the regulating member is in the standby state, the regulating member is moved such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, thereby regulating the swinging of the moving member, The moving member can perform a first movement that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second movement that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a recessed portion that is recessed away from the swinging trajectory of the outer shape portion of the moving member when executing the first action.

When the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member such that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated before the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation not intended to be restricted in the swinging direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force is required for the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member executes the first action, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a first biasing device is provided for generating a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation member is released from swinging the movable member and the movable member is moved toward the transmission member by an urging force, the inner cam portion of the transmission member and a first side surface, which is a side surface that contacts the moving member, is configured to contact a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the moving member is configured to contact the cylindrical portion. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the first side surface starts to abut against the moving member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member with the urging force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface of the transmission member that comes into contact with the moving member, is in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first shaft. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts contacting the cylindrical portion, it is possible to ensure the maximum swing displacement of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to establish a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is ensured immediately after the regulation of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released.

In the game machine C4, a game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swing motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotation direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member will collide with the moving member, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not collide with the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to know when the moving member and the transmission member come into contact with each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, since the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, thereby enhancing the performance effect. be able to.

With synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, thereby improving the swinging speed of the moving member. can be made

In any one of game machines C1 to C3, a first biasing device is provided for generating a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction approaching the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmitting member abuts against the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the game machine C6 includes a first biasing device that generates a biasing force for swinging the moving member in a direction toward the transmission member, and the transmission member is It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates about a first shaft, and when the regulation of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmission member contacts the moving member and follows the rotation of the transmission member to move. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on swinging of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<An example of the technical concept in which the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player; and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined with respect to each other.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibrating device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the direction of vibration of the vibrating device disposed on the moving member are inclined, the vibration generated by the vibrating device is transmitted to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that vibrates in a linear direction, a vibrator that vibrates by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a driving device for generating a driving force for swinging the moving member, and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a device for generating vibration, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the vibration of the vibrating device transmits the moving member. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device comprises a device that generates vibration in a linear direction, the vibration device is supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibration device is controlled. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a central axis is arranged in a manner passing through the second axis, and a cushioning member for absorbing vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is supported by the second shaft provided on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in a linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and the buffer member is arranged on the second shaft, the impact of the vibration can be reduced by the buffer member. As a result, vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and is constructed in such a manner that the rotation resistance of the second shaft increases by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing operation of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the vibration device and ensure a large vibration component, especially when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the player can switch between a state in which the vibrating device is easily rotated on the second shaft and a state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component.

A game machine D5 characterized in that, in the game machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is rigidly connected to the pushing member, so that the player can feel the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and oscillated about the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. By suppressing , the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to change the behavior of the vibration device according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second shaft provided on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged in a manner passing through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a pivot, by aligning the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device with the pivot position, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. As a result, loosening of fastening screws and deterioration of members occur at an early stage, resulting in a problem that the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device, vibration is caused by rotating the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the vibration device). In addition, the production effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

A game machine D7, wherein the game machine D6 comprises a detection device for detecting vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by a player.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the operation member held by the player is provided with the vibrating device, and the detecting device for detecting the vibration of the vibrating device is provided. By holding the operation member while the user is in the room, the vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. As a result, it is possible to detect whether the player is gripping the operating member (whether the player is in the stage of preparation for operating the moving member).

<An example of the technical concept of assisting the input timing of the moving member that performs the fanning>
A gaming machine E1 is characterized by comprising an input device for input operation by a player, the input device being driven in a direction toward and away from the player and comprising an input unit for performing an input operation.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing of operating an input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting to adjust the strength of hitting the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player. By operating the input unit in such a manner as to push it back when it comes into contact with the , the game machine can determine the timing of the operation of the input unit.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button, an operation of pulling a moving member, and the like.

In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device matches the direction of operating the input unit, and the vibrating device vibrates the input unit. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input section is inoperable when the vibration device is pressed against the input section, and the input section is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input section.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the vibration device is pressed against the input section, the input section is disabled, and when the vibration device is retracted from the input section, the input section is disabled. Since the portion can be operated, the vibrating device can have both a performance effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of determining the timing of operating the input portion.

In the game machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device that applies a reaction force to the player when the player operates the input unit is the same as the vibration when the transmission device transmits the vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side is smaller than that of the second urging device.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device, so the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force while securing a high speed for returning to the position where it is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of vibration passively felt by the player.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member of a size that can be held by the player, and when the player holds the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the player's palm. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device having the input unit is formed as a member of a size that can be held by the player, and when the player holds the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by gripping the input device further, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the grip of the input device can be eliminated.

Also, since the input section can be hidden by the palm, only the player holding the input section can grasp the vibration of the input section. As a result, it is possible to announce a big win or the like in a manner unnoticed by other players.

A gaming machine E5 in the gaming machine E4, characterized in that a locking portion for locking a finger is provided on the side opposite to the input portion of the input device.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced by receiving the vibration of the input part side with the palm and hooking the finger on the locking part. You can lock it inside your palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large vibration that the player feels.

<An example of the technical concept in which the spherical portion turns toward the player at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation portion operated by a player and configured to be movable; and a connection member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable. , when the attitude of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation part can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the attitude is reduced. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising correction means for changing the posture of an operation member in a direction.

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes an operation member having an operation portion such as a push button, and in which the posture of the operation member with respect to the player changes between a first state and a second state as the operation member moves. See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, for example, if the player takes a posture that allows easy operation in the first state, it may become difficult to operate in the second state. There is a problem that the change may cause the player to feel stress and dissatisfaction.

For example, if the operating member is placed at a distance from the front of the player and the operating part requires a push-down motion, even if the operating part can be operated easily, the operating member can extend in the left-right direction. By moving on an arc trajectory centered on the player, when the operation part changes to a mode requiring a pushing action from the front side, the space for arranging the arm that pushes the operation part becomes narrower, and the game It becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may give up operating the operation unit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the attitude of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation member by moving the connection member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. Since the correcting means is provided for changing the attitude of the operation member in the direction of reducing the amount of change when the operation is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the operation of the operation member. Therefore, by being configured so that it is easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is easy for the player to operate in the second state.

The correcting means is composed of, for example, a wall member and an abutment member disposed on the operation member in a manner capable of abutting against the wall member, and the correction is generated when the abutment member abuts against the wall member. A device that changes the posture of an operating member by a reaction force, a device composed of a gear group that meshes with gear teeth arranged on the operating member and applies a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. are exemplified.

Further, examples of the mode of movement of the connection member include rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, sliding movement in a linear direction, and the like.

In the game machine F1, a driving device for driving the connection member is provided. and a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained, and the load generated on the operation member from the correction means during the change state is oriented in the direction of braking the connection member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, since the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connection member, the connection member can be driven more easily than when the connection member always changes its posture. The driving force required for braking the connecting member can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correcting means during the change state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device is required to brake the connecting member. The force that needs to be generated can be assisted by the correction means and the load applied to the drive can be reduced.

For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and constitute the change state when the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the movement range, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the movement range It is possible to reduce the moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member due to the load, and to suppress the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to near the upper end of the movement range. , the driving force required to drive the connection member can be suppressed.

In the game machine F2, a member to be abutted by the correcting means is provided, and the attitude of the operating member is changed by the correcting means abutting on the member to be abutted when the operating member is moved. Characterized game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the attitude of the operating member changes due to the contact between the correcting means and the member to be contacted. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is disposed on the connecting member, and the attitude of the operating member can be maintained by the connecting member until the correcting means reaches the position where the abutted member is arranged. , it is possible to indicate the timing for the player to operate the operation unit.

In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is brought into the changed state, the operating member is changed to the above-described state by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated by the correcting means to the operating member. The game machine F4 is characterized in that the correction means is configured so as to be able to change its posture in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture is changed in the change state, the direction of displacement and the direction of force, which are directions opposite to the direction of the change in posture, face each other. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction that may cause the load to become excessive, the correcting means is configured to change the posture of the operating member in a predetermined direction, thereby suppressing destruction of the correcting means. can do.

In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the correction means, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the change in the posture of the operation member. can be generated, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operation member, the amount of movement of the operation member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operation member from the correction means as the amount of movement of the operation member increases. can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means comprises a contacted member that contacts, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the game machine main body, and the correcting means contacts the contacted member. A game machine F6 characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when the member comes into contact with the member is a direction having a directional component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means contacts the contacted member in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the lever member in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correcting means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member can be stabilized when the operating member contacts the abutted member and changes its posture, and the operability can be improved.

In the game machine F6, the abutted member protrudes so as to come into contact with the lever member by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more from the correcting means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the abutted member through the correcting means by the player's operation or the like, the abutted member is moved to the lever member. By projecting to the abutment position, the lever member is braked and the moving speed of the lever member can be suppressed. Movement resistance can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of a technical concept that enables switching between whether or not the spherical portion turns around at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation portion operated by a player, a connection member that connects the operation member to a gaming machine main body in such a manner that the operation member can move within a predetermined width, and a drive device that drives at least the connection member, and are connected to each other. In a game machine in which an operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture while the member is arranged at a predetermined position, a driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. a first operating state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture in a state in which a transmission member is provided and the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position; a second operating state in which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via a transmission member, and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture; The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state.

A gaming machine is known that includes an operation member and a connection member, and drives the operation member relative to the connection member by a driving device that drives the connection member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are situations where operability is emphasized and situations where performance effects are emphasized, there is only one type of movement of the operating member relative to the movement of the connecting member, so whether operability is emphasized. There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one of the two methods, which emphasized the production effect, and sacrificed the other.

For example, when a push button to be operated by a player is arranged on the operation member, the player can easily press the push button if the position of the push button as seen from the player is fixed, while the operation member Since the movement of the device itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to use the movement of the operating member to perform a large effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the first operation state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture while the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, and in the state where the connection member is arranged at the predetermined position, The second operating state in which the driving force of the drive device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture can be switched while the movement width of the operating member remains unchanged. , it is possible to achieve both operability and performance effects.

For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the orientation of the operation member is changed to the second orientation, and the push button is pushed in an orientation that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, when the performance is not required to be operated by the player, the posture of the operating member can be changed to the performance disregarding the operability by keeping the posture of the operating member as it is in the first posture, and the operating member can be greatly moved. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in operability and an improvement in performance.

In addition, since the movement width of the operation member is fixed between the first operation state and the second operation state, the player can determine which operation state the operation member is in until the posture of the operation member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether the player is playing, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, the operation member is kept in the first operation state until the timing at which the player operates the operation unit, and the operation member continues to reciprocate in a predetermined width, and at the predetermined timing, the operation member is switched to the second operation state and the attitude of the operation member is changed. , the player can be notified of the timing to press the operation part, and the operation member itself is made easy to press, so that the game is easy to understand (easy to understand the timing to press the push button) and comfortable (push button to make it easier to press).

The gaming machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force from the driving device to the connection member, and the eccentric cam member A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to either the transmission member or the connection member, and is provided with switching means capable of switching between the transmission member and the connection member.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member are driven at the same time, the driving force generated from the driving device can be suppressed.

As a mode for switching between transmission of the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member and transmission to the operating member, a group of gears that are connected to the operating member and the connecting member from the driving device by meshing are provided, and depending on the situation, A mode in which meshing gears can be switched, and an eccentric cam member is configured to contact either the connecting member or the transmission member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. A mode in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member contacts the transmission member while being rotated forward, the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that when the driving force is not transmitted to the operation member when the transmission member abuts on the transmission member in the state of being held.

Here, for example, in the case where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member when the eccentric cam member and the connection member are separated from each other, vibration during operation and operation of the operation member by the player may occur. For this reason, it becomes necessary to stop the driving device in order to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. and complicates the control of the drive.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member. Even if the eccentric cam member is separated from the cam member in the middle of the operation, as long as the eccentric cam member continues to rotate in a certain direction, the target of the driving force transmission will not be switched, so there is a risk that the driving force will be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. does not occur, and the control of the driving device can be made loose (immediate stopping of the driving device is unnecessary).

Moreover, since a detection sensor for detecting that the connection member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine G3, the eccentric cam member has a first projecting portion projecting along the rotation shaft on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a state capable of coming into contact with the first projecting portion. A second projecting portion is provided in a projecting manner, and has a region in which the second projecting portion moves closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member rotates. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second projecting portion is arranged closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, as the eccentric cam member rotates, the second projecting portion has a region that moves closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member. , the second projecting portion is arranged closer to the rotating shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion. It can be performed by passing the second projecting portion between the rotating shaft of.

Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the transmission member is restored after the second projecting portion moves to the outside of the trajectory of the outer diameter portion of the first projecting portion of the eccentric cam member, the first projecting portion is the first projecting portion. It is possible to suppress the rotation angle of the transmission member from the time it comes into contact with the 2 projecting portions to the time it separates, and it is possible to suppress the angular range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases.

In the gaming machine G4, the first projecting portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first projecting portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. The pushing wall surface that abuts against the second convex portion in a state in which the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation is inclined so as to come closer to the predetermined straight line as it goes away in the axial radial direction. Characteristic game machine G5.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member in which the driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member is forward rotation, contact with the transmission member. Since the pressing wall surface in contact with the straight line is configured to be inclined in such a manner that the further away it is in the axial radial direction, the closer it approaches to the predetermined straight line. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, since the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted via the transmission member per predetermined time can be reduced, a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operating member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

In any one of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member is provided for fixing the attitude of the connection member at a predetermined position, and when the lock member releases the fixation of the attitude of the connection member, the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. The game machine G6 is characterized in that, on the other hand, when the eccentric cam member rotates forward, the fixing of the attitude of the connecting member by the locking member is maintained.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the release of the fixing of the connection member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (positive rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in the . Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, both the maintenance of the attitude of the connecting member by the locking member and the change of the attitude of the operation member can be achieved, so that the control of the driving device can be moderated. can.

<An example of a technical concept in which the suppressing member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force that pushes out the second moving member>
and a first moving member configured to be movable; 2 a moving member, an elastic member disposed on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member and having one end connected to the second moving member and having spring elasticity; a suppressing member disposed at the other end of the elastic member and suppressing separation of the second moving member from the first moving member by being pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member; , wherein a portion of the second moving member projecting from the first moving member moves to increase a force for pressing the suppressing member against the first moving member.

A game machine is known that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that extends outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, the second moving member may collide with another member during movement of the first moving member and may be damaged, requiring replacement. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated when colliding with another member.

In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force compared to fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time and effort to screw in the screws during assembly and to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, resulting in a longer working time.

That is, it is necessary to firmly fix the second moving member to the first moving member, and to shorten the work time for assembling the second moving member to the first moving member and removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There is a problem that it is difficult to achieve both.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion projecting from the first moving member operates in the direction against the elastic force of the elastic member, and the force with which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the suppressing member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by the elastic force, the replacement time can be shortened, and even when the second moving member comes into contact with another member, the second moving member is kept in the first movement. Detachment from the member can be prevented.

In the game machine H1, a hook member is provided to hold the suppressing member immovably on the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being arranged at a part of a position movable in a direction pressed against the first moving member.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the position where the restraint member is movable in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member. Before being attached to the moving member, the space in which the hook member is attached becomes an empty space, so it becomes easy to dispose the suppressing member, and after attachment of the hook member, the suppressing member moves from the first moving member to the elastic member. Separation in the direction perpendicular to the elastic force can be suppressed.

In addition, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the position where the restraining member can move in the direction in which it is pressed against the first moving member, the force that holds the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member, and accordingly the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member.

In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraint member can be prevented from being illegally removed by the player, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member in the case of detachment or forgetting to assemble, and maintenance time can be shortened.

Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, the hook member can be configured to drop outside the first moving member when the hook member is detached from the first moving member, thereby preventing the hook member from dropping. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the need for maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

Furthermore, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be shrunk excessively by the dimension of the locking projection for locking the hook member so that it cannot be pulled out from the first moving member. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged on the outside of the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when the hook member is assembled can be reduced. can be suppressed. As a result, the elastic force of the elastic member can be kept large, and the holding strength of the second moving member and the suppressing member to the first moving member can be kept large (while using a stiffer elastic member), and the attachment of the hook member can be facilitated. can be made easier.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the hook member can be detached from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, by displacing the suppressing member disposed inside the first moving member in the direction opposite to the direction in which the elastic force is pressed, the hook member moves to the first position. Since it is detachable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally detaching the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress illegal removal of the hook member.

A game machine according to any one of the game machines H2 to H4, wherein the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by the suppression member entering a position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, the space where the hook member was arranged becomes vacant due to the breakage of the hook member, etc. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the buffering action against the load applied to the second moving member after the hook member is broken and the space in which it was arranged becomes empty. , the breakage of the second moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a configuration of the hook member, for example, a configuration that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while it is broken, so that it is possible to easily confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

In any one of game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulled-out state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member, and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized by being able to form a.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form the pulled state and the locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. , and a state in which fraud prevention performance can be improved by preventing the second moving member from being easily removed.

In the gaming machine H6, the pulled state can be formed by the suppression member entering a space in which the hook member is arranged in a state in which the suppression member is held by the hook member. Gaming machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by inserting the restraining member into the empty space in the state where the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state in which the members are arranged at the correct positions, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and illegal removal of the second moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from its normal position, a pulled state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, thereby improving maintenance performance. can be made

<An example of the technical concept of changing the rotational resistance of the spherical portion to the connection member>
An operation member configured to be operable by a player and a connection member movably supporting the operation member are provided, and the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction is reduced with respect to the connection member. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making variable.

A gaming machine is known that includes a connection member and an operation member configured to be movable with respect to the connection member (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, there is no change in the feeling of operation (for example, the weight felt by the player), and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

For example, even if the operating member is rotatably supported by the connecting member, and the rotation resistance is changed between forward rotation of the operating member and reverse rotation of the operating member, the player can rotate the operating member. Since the relationship between the direction of operation and the rotational resistance is always constant, the player is less likely to notice (discover) the action of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since it is provided with variable means for varying the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, the operation when the operation member is operated in the same direction The sense of operation of the member can be varied, and the interest of the player who operates the operation member can be enhanced.

In addition, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of the variable means includes a mode of adjusting the position of the connecting member, a mode of adjusting the amount of displacement of the operating member, and a (for example, a member for driving the connecting member) is used for adjustment.

For example, according to a mode in which adjustment is performed by members other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be understood only after touching the operating member. attention to the operation member can be increased.

Further, when the connection member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, by making it possible to switch between strength and weakness of the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member with respect to the movement resistance of the connection member with respect to the game machine main body, While asking the player to only operate the operating member, depending on the situation, it is easier to move the operating member relative to the connecting member than to move the connecting member relative to the main body of the game machine. It is possible to switch between situations in which it is easier to move the connection member with respect to the game machine main body than to move the (difference from hardening the push button).

The game machine I2 is characterized in that the connection member is configured to be movable in the game machine I1, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connection member.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member to the connection member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connection member, so the speed at which the connection member or the operation member is operated can be adjusted. It is possible to change the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member regardless of.

In addition, as a mode for adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connection member, there is a mode for changing the movement resistance corresponding to the movement amount of the connection member, and a movement resistance when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. are exemplified.

The game machine I2 includes a biasing member that generates an elastic force that biases the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, and a wall member that is disposed so as to be able to contact the operation member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member receives a load from the wall member in a first direction opposite to the biasing direction of the biasing member, A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is constructed in a manner in which the operating member is moved.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the operation member abuts against the wall member due to the connection member being arranged at the predetermined position, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member stationary against the connecting member is improved compared to the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at the predetermined position.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that the gaming machine I2 comprises a friction member which extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member while the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2, the operation member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. dynamic friction can be applied to the operation member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

As for the arrangement position of the friction member, a mode in which the friction member is disposed in the connection member and a mode in which the friction member is disposed in the main body case that supports the connection member are exemplified.

The gaming machine I4 comprises a main body case for supporting the connection member inside a box, and a cover member disposed outside the main body case, wherein the friction member extends from the cover member toward the connection member. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part provided.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged in the connection member. .

In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operation member in a rubbing state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction compared to the low friction portion, and they are A gaming machine I6 characterized by being divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

According to the game machine I6, it is possible to change the movement resistance of the operating member to the connection member depending on whether the operating member receives dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or receives dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two levels.

In the gaming machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member that configures the position of the center of gravity, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being filled.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member. The load applied to the operation member can be reduced compared to the case where the movement resistance of the operation member is increased by applying a load in the direction opposite to the direction.

In addition, since it is possible to improve the rotational resistance in the direction of rotation for lifting the weight member when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, by moving the weight member and reversing the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis. , the direction in which the rotation resistance increases can be reversed. Therefore, it is possible to change the feeling of operation given to the player.

As a mode for moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to a change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship of both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. A mode in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates driving force, a transmission device configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connection member, and a resistance change member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operation member by displacement. , wherein the resistance change member is displaced by the driving force of the driving device.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member is adjusted by displacing the resistance change member with the driving force of the driving device that drives the connection member, so additional driving is provided. Without any device, the movement resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member.

Therefore, the state of movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only after the player touches it, and the value of touching the operating member for the player can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operation member is changed when an advantageous state is reached, it is possible to notify that the player is in an advantageous state in a manner that only the player who operates the operation member can understand. .

In any of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine J1 characterized by: Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by: Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that includes an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by being manually operated by a player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). Gazette).
However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating members.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine with good operability of operation members.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises an operating member which has an operating portion operated by a player and is configured to be movable, and which connects the operating member and the gaming machine main body and is movable. movement of the connecting member, the posture of the operating member viewed from the player who operates the operating section is changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state. Correction means is provided for changing the attitude of the operating member in a direction that reduces the amount of change in the attitude when it can be formed.
A gaming machine according to Technical Idea 2 is the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1, further comprising a driving device for driving the connection member, wherein the operation member changes its posture within the movement range of the connection member; A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the operating member is not changed and the postures of the operating member and the connecting member are maintained, and the load generated on the operating member from the correcting means during the changed state is applied to the connecting member. Face the direction to brake.
A gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 2, further comprising a member to be abutted by the correcting means, wherein the correcting means contacts the member to be abutted when the operation member is moved. The attitude of the operating member changes due to the contact.
<effect>
According to the game machine described in technical idea 1, the operability of the operation member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, operability during the drive operation can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the weight of the operation member can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a insertion hole (locking portion)
313d second sensor member (detection device)
317, 13317 lens member (part of input device, input unit, pushing member, operation unit)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 inner case member (part of support member, body case)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first shaft, second shaft)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 first driving device (driving device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 lock member (restriction member, lock member)
338 gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of member to be regulated)
363 pivot rod (second axis)
364 buffer member 366 vibrating device (part of production member, vibrating device)
366b pressing member (vibrating portion)
2333a body member (rotating gear)
2333b cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 curved wall portion (recessed portion)
13312, 15312, 20312 posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a contact member (second moving member)
13312b support member 13312c hook member (lock member)
13322 right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (abutted member)
14333c2 projecting portion (first projecting portion)
14337 posture switching device (switching means)
14337a body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 projecting portion (second projecting portion)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extended portion (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
CS1 Oscillating coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 pushing coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 torsion spring (first biasing member, biasing member)
SP13 coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

Claims (3)

An operation member having an operation unit operated by a player and configured to be movable; and a connection member configured to connect the operation member and the game machine body and be movable,
When the posture of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state by the movement of the connection member, the posture A gaming machine characterized by comprising correction means for changing the posture of the operation member in a direction that reduces the amount of change in the position of the operating member. A driving device for driving the connecting member is provided, and in a moving range of the connecting member, the attitude of the operating member is changed, and the attitude of the operating member and the connecting member is maintained without the attitude of the operating member being changed. and a maintenance state is formed,
2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein the load applied to said operating member from said correcting means during said changing state is oriented in a direction for braking said connecting member. 3. The apparatus further comprises a member to be abutted against the correcting means, wherein the posture of the operating member is changed when the correcting means abuts against the member to be abutted during movement of the operating member. 2. The game machine described.

Images